Access

DM/DB Access
Administrators Guide for Windows

August 1994 DNA113310
Version 5.0
Warranties and Liabilities

All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and should not be considered commitments by Intergraph Corporation. Intergraph Corporation assumes no responsibility for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies.
Trademarks
CLIX, Intergraph, and RIS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. DBACCESS, DMANDS, DM/CAPTURE, DM/MANAGER, DM/REDLINE, DMRS, DM/VIEW, I/NFM, and TD1 are trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. All other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
Copyright
1994 Intergraph Corporation All Rights Reserved Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization. RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001
We want your suggestions...

We are continually working on updates and improvements to the TIM and Database Systems documents. If you have suggestions, you can reach us by any of the following means:
Mail
FAX
Electronic Mail
If you need help, call...
Product & Documentation Support
Training Registration
You can access the TIM and Database Systems Product Training Directory on-line using the Intergraph On-line Reference Library (I/ORL) CD.
Order Desk
Intergraph General Information
7/93
Table of Contents v
Table of Contents
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
vi Table of Contents
Table of Contents vii
Table of Contents
1.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Before You Begin .................................................................................................. 1.1 Using On-line Help ...................................................................................... 1.1.1 Parts of the Help Window ................................................................
1-3 1-6 1-6 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-6 2-6 2-7 2-7 2-8 2-8 3-3 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-5 3-5 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-5
2.
Getting Started ..................................................................................................... 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 DM/DB Access Structure and Functions .................................................... Changes to DM/DB Access ........................................................................... Creating a Database .................................................................................... Attaching a RIS Schema .............................................................................. Templates ..................................................................................................... 2.5.1 2.6 Template Libraries ...........................................................................
Join Columns ................................................................................................ 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 Multi-Schema Joins .......................................................................... Outer Joins ....................................................................................... Edit Relations ...................................................................................
3.
Application Builder ............................................................................................... 3.1 3.2 Application Components .............................................................................. Programming a Windows Application ......................................................... 3.2.1 3.3 3.4 Visual Interface API .........................................................................
Handling Events .......................................................................................... Accessing the Application Builder ...............................................................
4.
Dialogs ................................................................................................................... 4.1 Dialog Types ................................................................................................. 4.1.1 Default Dialogs ................................................................................. 4.1.1.1 4.1.1.2 4.1.1.3 Database Utilities Gadgets ............................................... Graphic Utilities ................................................................ General Utilities ................................................................
viii Table of Contents
4.1.2 4.2 4.3 4.4
Blank Dialogs ...................................................................................
4-5 4-6 4-6 4-7 4-8 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-5 5-6 5-6 5-7 6-3 7-3 7-3 8-3 8-3 9-3 9-3 9-5 9-5 9-7 10 - 3 11 - 3 11 - 3 12 - 3 12 - 4 12 - 4 12 - 5
Dialog Design Considerations ..................................................................... Dialog Scripts ............................................................................................... Accessing the Dialog Builder ....................................................................... 4.4.1 Dialog Builder Toolbox .....................................................................
5.
Reports .................................................................................................................. 5.1 Report Types ................................................................................................ 5.1.1 5.1.2 Default Reports ................................................................................. Blank Reports ................................................................................... 5.1.2.1 5.2 5.3 Unrelated Tables Reports ..................................................
Accessing the Report Builder ...................................................................... Processing Reports .......................................................................................
6. 7.
Edit Script ............................................................................................................. Template Librarian .............................................................................................. Accessing the Template Librarian .......................................................................
8.
Bitmap Loader ...................................................................................................... Accessing the Bitmap Loader ...............................................................................
9.
Database Edit ....................................................................................................... 9.1 9.2 Accessing Database Edit .............................................................................. Creating and Using Query Criteria ............................................................ 9.2.1 9.3 Using Query Functions ....................................................................
Editing Database Values .............................................................................
10. 11.
SQL Statements ................................................................................................. Schema Edit ........................................................................................................ 11.1 Accessing Schema Edit ............................................................................
12.
DB Access Graphics ............................................................................................ 12.1 12.2 12.3 DB Access Graphics Linkages ................................................................. Database Edit Graphics Linkages Functions ......................................... DB Access/MicroStation Vector Graphics ...............................................
Table of Contents ix
12.3.1 12.4
Accessing DB Access from a MicroStation Design File .............
12 - 5 12 - 7 12 - 7 12 - 10 13 - 3 A-1 A-3 A-5 A-7 A - 10 A - 12 A - 15 A - 17 A - 19 A - 21 B-1 B-4 C-1 C-3 C-4 C-6 C-8 C-9 C - 11 C - 12 C - 13 C - 14 C - 18 C - 19 C - 21 C - 23 C - 25 C - 27 C - 29 C - 35 C - 36 C - 38 C - 39 C - 40 C - 42 C - 44 D-1 D-3 D-5 D - 11
DB Access Raster Graphics ..................................................................... 12.4.1 Workflow for Raster Graphics .................................................... 12.4.1.1 DB Access Raster Graphics Dialog ...........................
13.
DB Access Commands ........................................................................................ Add Query (Database Edit) ................................................................................ Add Query (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................ AND/OR Toggle (Dialog Builder) ....................................................................... Attach DAP Link (Database Edit) ..................................................................... Attach DAP Link (Dialog Builder) ..................................................................... Attach DB Linkage (Database Edit) .................................................................. Attach DB Linkage (Dialog Builder) ................................................................. Attach File Link (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................... Attach Note Link (Dialog Builder) ..................................................................... Auto Sequence (Dialog Builder) ......................................................................... Build Schema List (Schema Edit) ...................................................................... Button (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................................... Cancel (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................................... Cancel (Raster Graphics) ................................................................................... Change All (Database Edit) ............................................................................... Change All (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................... Change Row (Database Edit) ............................................................................. Change Row (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. Check Box (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................ Clear All Dialogs (Dialog Builder) ..................................................................... Column (Dialog Builder) .................................................................................... Column (Report Builder) .................................................................................... Combo Box (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................... Copy Field ........................................................................................................... Copy Gadget (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................ Copy Line ............................................................................................................ Copy Redlines (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................... Counter (Report Builder) .................................................................................... Create/Alter Table (Schema Edit) ...................................................................... Create/Edit Group (Dialog Builder) ................................................................... Create Sequence (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................... Current Row (Database Edit) ............................................................................ Current Row (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................ Current Row Slider (Dialog Builder) ................................................................. Current Row Text (Dialog Builder) .................................................................... Current Table Text (Dialog Builder) ................................................................. Database Utilities (Dialog Builder) ................................................................... Date ..................................................................................................................... Define Structure ................................................................................................. Delete (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................................
Table of Contents
Delete All (Database Edit) ................................................................................. Delete All (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................. Delete Field ......................................................................................................... Delete Gadget (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................... Delete Group (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... Delete Line .......................................................................................................... Delete Redlines (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................ Delete Row (Database Edit) ............................................................................... Delete Row (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................... Delete Sequence (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................... Delete Space ........................................................................................................ Derived ................................................................................................................ Design Options .................................................................................................... Dial (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................................... Display Group (Dialog Builder) ......................................................................... Display Labels (Dialog Builder) ......................................................................... Display Dialog (Dialog Builder) ......................................................................... Document List (Dialog Builder) ......................................................................... Draw Arc (Dialog Builder) .................................................................................. Draw Arrow (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. Draw Block (Dialog Builder) .............................................................................. Draw Circle (Dialog Builder) .............................................................................. Draw Ellipse (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................ Draw Filled Block (Dialog Builder) .................................................................... Draw Filled Circle (Dialog Builder) ................................................................... Draw Filled Ellipse (Dialog Builder) ................................................................. Draw Filled Shape (Dialog Builder) ................................................................... Draw Freehand (Dialog Builder) ....................................................................... Draw Line (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................ Draw Shape (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. Draw Symbol (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... Draw Text (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................ Drop From Group (Dialog Builder) .................................................................... Drop Table (Schema Edit) .................................................................................. Dump Template .................................................................................................. Edit Code (Database Edit) .................................................................................. Edit Code (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................. Edit Dialog Parameters (Dialog Builder) .......................................................... Edit Field ............................................................................................................ Edit Gadget (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. Edit Line ............................................................................................................. Edit Privileges (Schema Edit) ............................................................................ Edit Query (Database Edit) ............................................................................... Edit Query (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................... Edit Report Parameters ..................................................................................... Erase Fence (Raster Graphics) .......................................................................... Exit ...................................................................................................................... Expanded Summary (Dialog Builder) ................................................................ Fence Block (Raster Graphics) ........................................................................... Fence Copy (Dialog Builder) ..............................................................................
D - 12 D - 13 D - 15 D - 17 D - 19 D - 20 D - 21 D - 23 D - 24 D - 26 D - 27 D - 28 D - 30 D - 32 D - 34 D - 36 D - 38 D - 40 D - 43 D - 45 D - 47 D - 49 D - 51 D - 53 D - 55 D - 57 D - 59 D - 61 D - 63 D - 65 D - 67 D - 69 D - 71 D - 72 D - 73 E-1 E-5 E-7 E - 10 E - 11 E - 13 E - 16 E - 18 E - 19 E - 21 E - 23 E - 24 E - 26 F-1 F-2
Table of Contents xi
Fence Delete (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................ Fence Edit (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................ Fence Move (Dialog Builder) .............................................................................. Fence Operations (Dialog Builder) .................................................................... Fence Shape (Raster Graphics) .......................................................................... Field Format (Report Builder) ........................................................................... Fields On/Off (Database Edit) ............................................................................ Fields On/Off (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... Field Operations (Report Builder) ..................................................................... Field Plus (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................. Fit View (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................... Fit (Raster Graphics) .......................................................................................... Gadget Groups (Dialog Builder) ......................................................................... Gadget Operations (Dialog Builder) .................................................................. Gadget Sequencing (Dialog Builder) .................................................................. Gauge (Dialog Builder) ....................................................................................... General Utilities (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................... Grid (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................................... Grid Lock (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................. Group Box (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................ Group Copy (Dialog Builder) .............................................................................. Group Delete (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... Group Edit (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................... Group Move (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. Group Operations (Dialog Builder) .................................................................... Help (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................................... Initialize Query (Database Edit) ........................................................................ Initialize Query (Dialog Builder) ....................................................................... Insert Row (Database Edit) ................................................................................ Insert Row (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................... Insert Space (Report Builder) ............................................................................ Key Column (Database Edit) ............................................................................. Key Column (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. Line (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................................... Line Operations (Report Builder) ...................................................................... Line Script .......................................................................................................... Links Commands (Dialog Builder) .................................................................... Linkage Mode (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................... List Box (Dialog Builder) .................................................................................... Load File (Dialog Builder) .................................................................................. Load File (Raster Graphics) ............................................................................... Load From Library ............................................................................................. Locate Graphics (Database Edit) ....................................................................... Locate Graphics (Dialog Builder) ....................................................................... Measure (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................... Measure (Raster Graphics) ................................................................................ Modify Sort ......................................................................................................... Move Field ........................................................................................................... Move Gadget (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................ Move Line ............................................................................................................
F-4 F-6 F-9 F - 11 F - 12 F - 13 F - 15 F - 16 F - 18 F - 19 F - 20 F - 22 G-1 G-2 G-3 G-4 G-5 G-6 G-7 G-9 G - 10 G - 12 G - 14 G - 17 G - 19 H-1 I-1 I-2 I-4 I-5 I-7 K-1 K-2 L-1 L-3 L-4 L-7 L-9 L - 11 L - 12 L - 14 L - 15 L - 18 L - 19 M-1 M-3 M-4 M-8 M - 10 M - 12
xii Table of Contents
Move Redlines (Dialog Builder) ......................................................................... Multiple Column (Dialog Builder) ..................................................................... Multi-Column Field (Dialog Builder) ................................................................. Multi Gadget (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... Multiple Reports (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................... New Blank (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................... New Blank (Report Builder) ............................................................................... New Default (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. New Default (Report Builder) ............................................................................ Next Row (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................. Numeric ............................................................................................................... Override Key-in (Dialog Builder) ....................................................................... Page ..................................................................................................................... Pan (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................................... Pan (Raster Graphics) ........................................................................................ Pick Row (Dialog Builder) .................................................................................. Place Fence Block (Dialog Builder) .................................................................... Place Fence Shape (Dialog Builder) ................................................................... Place Field (Report Builder) ............................................................................... Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................ Place Line ............................................................................................................ Plot Window (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................ Plot Window (Raster Graphics) .......................................................................... Previous Row (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... Process Dialog ..................................................................................................... Process Query (Database Edit) .......................................................................... Process Query (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................... Process Report .................................................................................................... Query (Dialog Builder) ....................................................................................... Quit (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................................... Quit (Raster Graphics) ....................................................................................... Radio Button (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... Raster View (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. Rectangle (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................. Relational Operator (Dialog Builder) ................................................................ Remove Fence (Database Edit) .......................................................................... Remove Fence (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................... Remove Linkage (Database Edit) ...................................................................... Remove Linkage (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................... Report (Database Edit) ....................................................................................... Report (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................................... Restore Defaults (Database Edit) ...................................................................... Restore Defaults (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................... Review (Database Edit) ...................................................................................... Review (Dialog Builder) ..................................................................................... Review Element (Database Edit) ....................................................................... Review Element (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................... Review Sequence (Dialog Builder) ..................................................................... RIS Schema Manager ......................................................................................... Rotate (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................................
M - 13 M - 15 M - 18 M - 19 M - 23 N-1 N-2 N-4 N-6 N-9 N - 11 O-1 P-1 P-3 P-5 P-6 P-8 P - 10 P - 12 P - 14 P - 22 P - 25 P - 27 P - 28 P - 30 P - 31 P - 32 P - 34 Q-1 Q-3 Q-5 R-1 R-3 R-5 R-6 R-8 R - 10 R - 12 R - 15 R - 17 R - 18 R - 19 R - 20 R - 22 R - 24 R - 26 R - 29 R - 31 R - 32 R - 72
Table of Contents xiii
Rotate Raster (Raster Graphics) ........................................................................ Save Dialog (Dialog Builder) .............................................................................. Save Options ....................................................................................................... Save Report ......................................................................................................... Schema Select (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................... Scrollbar (Dialog Builder) .................................................................................. Select Redlines (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................ Set Query (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................. Show Group (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. Show Links (Dialog Builder) .............................................................................. Show Links (Raster Graphics) ........................................................................... Single Column (Dialog Builder) ......................................................................... Single Report (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... Slider (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................................ Spin Box (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................... SQL Statement (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................ Symbol (Dialog Builder) ..................................................................................... System Command (Dialog Builder) ................................................................... Table Select (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. Text (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................................... Text Box (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................... Text (Report Builder) .......................................................................................... Text Size .............................................................................................................. Time .................................................................................................................... Undelete Fence (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................ Undelete Field (Report Builder) ......................................................................... Undelete Gadget (Dialog Builder) ...................................................................... Undelete Group (Dialog Builder) ....................................................................... Undelete Line (Report Builder) .......................................................................... Update View (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................ Update (Raster Graphics) .................................................................................. Update Active (Database Edit) .......................................................................... Update Active (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................... Update Row (Database Edit) ............................................................................. Update Row (Dialog Builder) ............................................................................. Undo Redlines (Dialog Builder) ......................................................................... User Gadgets (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... User Variable (Report Builder) .......................................................................... USTN Command (Dialog Builder) ..................................................................... Window Area (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................... Window Area (Raster Graphics) ........................................................................ Window Center (Dialog Builder) ........................................................................ Window Center (Raster Graphics) ..................................................................... Window Scroll (Dialog Builder) .......................................................................... Window Scroll (Raster Graphics) ....................................................................... Worksheet (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................ Zoom In (Dialog Builder) .................................................................................... Zoom In (Raster Graphics) ................................................................................. Zoom Out (Dialog Builder) ................................................................................. Zoom Out (Raster Graphics) ..............................................................................
R - 74 S-1 S-3 S-5 S-7 S-9 S - 11 S - 13 S - 15 S - 16 S - 18 S - 19 S - 23 S - 25 S - 27 S - 28 S - 30 S - 32 T-1 T-3 T-4 T-5 T-7 T-8 U-1 U-2 U-3 U-4 U-5 U-6 U-8 U-9 U - 10 U - 12 U - 13 U - 15 U - 17 U - 19 U - 22 W-1 W-3 W-4 W-6 W-7 W-9 W - 10 Z-1 Z-3 Z-4 Z-6
xiv Table of Contents
Appendix A: Appendix B: B.1 B.2
DB Access Environment Variables ..................................................... DB Access Reserved Tables ................................................................
AA - 3 BB - 3 BB - 4 BB - 4 BB - 4 BB - 4 BB - 6 BB - 6 BB - 8 CC - 3 DD - 3 EE - 3 GL - 3 IN - 3
Tables Needed for Raster Graphics ................................................................... Unique Row Identification ................................................................................. B.2.1 B.2.2 B.2.3 mslink Column ....................................................................................... Key Columns (mscatalog Table) ............................................................ Unique Index ..........................................................................................
B.3 B.4
Coded Columns and mscodelist ......................................................................... mscolumns .......................................................................................................... Timestamp Columns ........................................................................... DB Access Error Messages ................................................................. DB Access Global Variables ................................................................
Appendix C: Appendix D: Appendix E:
Glossary ....................................................................................................................... Index ............................................................................................................................
Before You Begin 1 - 1
Before You Begin
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1-2
Before You Begin
1.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Before You Begin

DM/DB Access is a member of the Intergraphs DM family of products. It is a comprehensive application builder and integration tool. The product combines an intuitive, graphical interface for dialog building with extensive open systems capabilities. This combination lets you build custom applications that integrate diverse databases, platforms, and applications. By enabling extensive interoperability, DM/DB Access allows an organizations network of information to be shared by multiple users with individual needs at workgroup, departmental, and enterprise wide levels. Do not attempt to run DM/View or DM/Redline if you are using any viewing and redlining functions in DM/DB Access. If you are using any NFM functions, do not attempt to run DM/Manager. There are calls made to .dll files from DM/DB Access that could cause the applications to close and any data being manipulated could be adversely affected.
Document Purpose
This document describes the functions and commands in the Intergraph DM/DB Access Administrator Toolkit product. This document is intended for database system administrators.
Document Prerequisites
This document assumes that you: Understand SQL database terminology and structure. Are familiar with the Intergraph Relational Interface System (RIS).
1-4
Before You Begin
Related Documentation
You can refer to the following documents for additional information: DNA1001 DNA1116 DNA0016 DDA0013 DB Access Programmers Guide Relational Interface System (RIS) for Windows NT SQL Users Guide Intergraph I/Forms Reference Manual I/NFM Administrators Users Guide
Additional Information
The text files containing information about the product are delivered with DM/DB Access. The README.TXT file is located in the c:\win32app\ingr\dba directory. Located in c:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc directory are other text files containing information.
Document Conventions
Filenames and directory paths appear in italic typeface. However, the italic typeface is also used for emphasis of new words or important phrases. For example: c:\windows Command names, menu names, tools, system prompts and messages, and keys may appear in boldface type. For example: File menu OR Press Enter The word mouse refers to the 2-button or 3-button mouse. The word select means to select a command by pressing the left mouse button over a menu command or by pressing the Alt key and the underlined character simultaneously. The word choose means to choose a button or icon by pressing the left mouse button over a Toolbar button, or application icon. The word reset means to terminate a command initiated with the mouse. Reset by pressing the right mouse button. The word identify means to define an area or place graphic elements in a graphics file. For PCs, identify with the left mouse button.
The phrase key in generally means to enter data into a field on a dialog box. To advance to the next field, use the Tab key. Do not use the Enter key to advance to the next field. This key is mostly used as the default key to accept a dialog box instead of pressing the OK button. System key-ins, keywords, and programming code segments, appear in monospaced type. For example:
main ( )
OR commit In actual usage, keywords can be in either upper or lowercase. Words that appear in angle brackets, < >, are identifiers or names that you must supply, or dynamic information that can change for each error message. For example: ERROR: Error opening the file <filename> Phrases in square brackets, [ ], are optional phrases. Curly braces contain several options (used in conjunction with a logical OR symbol ( | )) or phrases that can be repeated (used in conjunction with [, ...]). A comma followed by a series of three periods in square brackets ([, ...]) indicates that the last phrase contained within curly braces ({}), or the last item, can be repeated numerous times (separated by commas). For example: { <column> <data type> } [, ...] means that numerous column names and associated data types can be specified (separated by commas). The logical or symbol ( | ) separates phrases or keywords within curly braces ({}) that can be used alone but not together. For example: { user | database } means that either the user keyword or the database keyword can be specified, but not both. This symbol notes important information.
This symbol cautions about operations that can cause limited damage.
1-6
Before You Begin
This symbol warns about operations that can cause severe damage.
1.1 Using On-line Help

On-line Help is an on-line reference tool accessible at any time the application is in use. The on-line Help contains a description for each command and tool and step-by-step procedures for common tasks. For example, if you need to perform a certain task, search and display the topic. You can move or resize your application and Help windows so that they are next to each other. This lets you follow the procedures without having to search for the pages in the documentation.
1.1.1 Parts of the Help Window

To view the on-line Help, select Contents from the Help menu. To get more specific information, select one of the major topics or perform a search on a specific topic.
Use Contents
To Display a listing of the table of contents for the on-line Help file. Locate information about a certain topic that you enter in the Search box. Take you back to the previous Help topics you have already viewed. Display a sequential list of every Help topic you have viewed during your current Windows session.
Search
Back
History
Find
Display a dialog box used to retrieve partial or full text strings in the help file. Use the Hints button for information on constructing your search query. View the previous topic in a series of related topics. The button is dimmed when you reach the first topic in the series. View the next topic in a series of related topics. The button is dimmed when you reach the last topic in the series. If the graphics in the on-line Help appear distorted, check your graphics driver. If you are using an Intergraph TD1 machine, the S3 1024x768 256 color (Large Font) distorts the graphics slightly. Changing to the (Small Font) version corrects the display. If you are using other drivers, check with your PC manual for information about available graphics drivers.
<<
>>
1-8
Before You Begin
Getting Started 2 - 1
Getting Started
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2-2
Getting Started
2.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Getting Started
DM/DB Access is a relational database tool that lets you access ANSI/ISO SQL-standard databases supported by the Intergraph Relational Interface System (RIS). DM/DB Access can create reports and dialogs that link otherwise incompatible information: CAD files, ASCII files, scanned documents and drawings, and RIS-supported databases. DM/DB Access is comprised of the DM/DB Access Administrator Toolkit and a DM/DB Access runtime product. The DM/DB Access Administrator Toolkit is designed for the system database administrator or person who controls the databases on a network. It lets you design custom dialogs and reports to determine the levels of access different users can have to the databases on your network. The DM/DB Access runtime product provides the software required to run dialogs and reports that are generated with the DB Access Administrator Toolkit. One person can use the DM/DB Access Administrator Toolkit to generate custom dialogs for all database users on a network. Other workstations on the network require only the DB Access runtime product to use the dialogs to access and manipulate databases across the network. DM/DB Access also lets you design and run reports on alphanumeric user data, binary, and ASCII data. You can customize user data reports that are provided with Intergraph applications. For more information, see these sections: 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 DM/DB Access Structure and Functions Changes to DM/DB Access Creating a Database Attaching an RIS Schema Templates Join Columns Edit Relations
2-4
Getting Started
2.1 DM/DB Access Structure and Functions

The DM/DB Access Administrator Toolkit comprises four functional areas: Dialogs This function lets you create dialogs that control the level of access different users have to your companys database resources. You can design dialogs that: Provide a user with read-only or read/write access to one or more tables in one or more databases. Restrict a users access to specific columns in a table. Access information from more than one table through the use of join columns. Contain gadgets that execute PC-NT or MicroStation commands, or call DB Access script functions. Call other dialogs. Reports This function lets you design report templates, which process information from a relational database to generate report output. You can: Interactively place column fields to report on one or more tables in one or more databases. Place fields to display text, the date, time, and page number, and to provide numeric information (totals, averages, and so forth). Establish sort criteria, print conditions, and reset conditions for lines and fields in the report. Use system and user-defined variables to build scripts that provide more flexibility in formatting report output. Utilities This function includes Database Edit, SQL Statements, and Schema Edit. Database Edit gives you a graphic window of the attached database. You can edit rows in the database, create query criteria to search for rows with common properties, or generate on-screen reports to review the universe of rows that the query criteria create. SQL Statements let you create, store, and recall commonly used Structured Query Language statements. Schema Edit provides an interactive tool for creating and reviewing RIS schemas, building a schema list, and creating and altering tables. Raster Graphics This function lets you load and view raster graphics and text files. You can link a raster file to other raster files, to text files, or to database rows.
2.2 Changes to DM/DB Access

For a complete listing of changes since the last release of this document, see the c:\win32app\ingr\dba\readme.txt file.
2.3 Creating a Database

Before you use DB Access, you must create a database with your relational database management system (RDBMS). Each RDBMS has specific requirements for creating a database. See the RDBMS-specific documents for information.
2.4 Attaching a RIS Schema

DB Access attaches to a database through the Intergraph Relational Interface System (RIS). RIS is a generic relational database interface that isolates the differences in specific vendors relational database management systems (RDBMSs). Each user of a database must have a RIS schema created for that database. A schema defines a unique database/user combination in the commercial RDBMS. See the Relational Interface System (RIS) for Windows NT SQL Users Guide for information on creating schemas. The following methods, listed in order of precedence, attaches a schema to DB Access. If no schema is attached when DB Access is invoked, you can specify a schema in the Schema field on the main dialog. You can key in the schema name or select the list indicator at the end of the field to display a list of available schemas. Select a schema from the list. You can specify a RIS schema with the -s command line option when you invoke DB Access from the DOS prompt. For example:
dba -s <schema>
You can set the environment variable DBA_SCHEMA in your propertities under the command line on c: drive or the autoexec.bat file. See the section DB Access Environment Variables for information on using DB Access environment variables.
2.5 Templates
DB Access stores various types of output as templates. For example, you can save reports created with the Report Builder as report templates in a template library. Templates can be used repeatedly or they can serve as the starting point for new templates.
2-6
Getting Started
The following types of templates can be stored in a template library: Applications Bitmap Dialogs Design options Query criteria Palettes Relations Reports Report structures Scripts SQL statements Status Bar Toolbars You must assign a name for a template when saving it to a template library. Template names must consist of 20 or fewer alphanumeric characters with no embedded spaces. It is recommended that you use the underbar character (_) between words.
2.5.1 Template Libraries

A template library is a data file in which you can store templates. You can create multiple libraries and group templates according to application, use, privilege, or type. A special command-line process, the Template Librarian (templib), lets you manipulate templates and template libraries. See the section Template Librarian for more information. The Template Librarian is also located on the DB Access main menu. Any time you see a Library field on a dialog, you can create a new template library by keying in a template library name that does not exist (full or relative filename) and answering Yes to create it.
To attach a template library, you can specify a library name: 1. Using the -l option when you invoke DB Access from the command line under properties on c: drive. For example:
dba -l <library>
2. 3.
In the Library field of the Load From Library dialog. In the DBA_LIB environment variable. (You can also specify a list of template libraries in the DBA_LIB_LIST environment variable.)
2.6 Join Columns

DB Access lets you relate the data in any two RIS-supported database tables that share a common column. These join columns are not required to have the same name, but they must have common values. The following figure shows the columns for the manufacturer, parts, and sale tables created by the auto.sql file. Potential join columns are highlighted.
2.6.1 Multi-Schema Joins

You can use multi-schema joins to relate information from more than one schema. Multischema joins require that you specify a schema list, using the -S command-line option or the DBA_SCHEMA_LIST environment variable.
2-8
Getting Started
The primary schema in a multi-schema join must have select access to the secondary schemas tables. Use the RIS GRANT command to grant select access.
2.6.2 Outer Joins

The Join Columns dialog lets you specify whether or not a join should be an outer join (as opposed to a standard join).
If you select Yes, the resulting universe includes all occurrences from the primary table whether or not it has a corresponding row in the secondary (join) table. If you select No, the resulting universe includes only those occurrences for which the join column values are equal (for example, parts.part_num = sale.part_num). In general, outer joins process faster than standard joins across schemas. Standard joins process faster if the tables are in the same schema. Query criteria for the secondary table are ignored for outer joins, but used for standard joins.
2.7 Edit Relations

The Edit Relations dialog (available from Schema Edit) lets the Database Administrator graphically depict relations between tables in the database and store this information in a DBA template library. Once a relations template has been created and attached to a dialog/report from the Edit Dialog or Edit Report dialogs, the dialog/report designer can place columns from joined tables without being aware of the complexity of the database. Relations can be simple, as in previous versions with the Join Columns dialog, or complex, consisting of several tables and multiple columns to each table join. DBA can find the shortest available route between tables when performing runtime join operations. If no relations template is attached, or if no path exists between the tables to be joined, the Join Columns dialog is displayed the first time a join is specified. Existing dialogs/reports will work as before without change. In fact, the relations template is ignored unless the Join Columns dialog for the joined column is blank. DBA 5.0 Edit Relations does not support multi-schema joins or outer joins. However, the Join Columns dialog can be used to specify simple multi-schema joins and outer joins, as in past versions.
The following commands are available from the Edit Relations dialog: Template The name of the relations template. Description The description of the relations template. Load Relations Displays the Load from Library dialog for loading an existing relations template. Save Relations Displays the Save Template dialog for saving a new or changed relations template. Add Join Displays the Join Columns dialog for adding new joins. Delete Join Deletes a join, by selecting the connecting line between the join columns. Move Table Aligns the table fields as wanted (added joins are placed automatically). Delete Table Deletes a table and all associated joins.
2 - 10
Getting Started
Application Builder 3 - 1
Application Builder
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3-2
Application Builder
3.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Application Builder
DB Access provides Windows users with the tools necessary to build an application with the true Windows look-and-feel (LAF). The Application Builder lets you define and edit a basic application, and the VI API lets you to modify the application at runtime. See the DBA Programmers Guide or on-line script help from the Edit Script dialog for a description of the VI API.
3.1 Application Components

A Windows LAF application can consist of the following components: A main application window (like the File Manager). Optional pulldown menus, with commands and cascading palettes. An optional toolbar. An optional status bar. The DB Access Application Builder lets you load default or blank components of each variety, and attach scripts as needed to each component. The builder allows specification of the following parameters:
Main Application Window

Name and description. Title, collapse icon, and cursor bitmap. Initial size and location. Initial script and notify script. Pulldown menus, toolbars, and status bars. Windows border icons (maximize, minimize, horizontal/vertical scroll bars, system menu, Multi Document Interface (MDI) client.
3-4
Application Builder
Pulldown Menus
Palettes and their commands. Palette script. Initial command settings (checked, enabled). Command scripts.
Toolbars
Toolbar script. Gadgets (buttons, fields). Gadget scripts.
Status Bars
Fields.
Dialog Boxes
All I/Forms for Windows gadgets, plus I/Forms for Windows extensions. Dialog script. Gadget scripts. Modal as opposed to.
3.2 Programming a Windows Application

Applications can be coded in a combination of native C and scripting languages. They can call DM/DB Access, VI, I/Forms for Windows functions or functions in any DLL, from either language. Generally it is best to use scripting hooks to native code in DLLs for computeintensive functionality. Scripts should be used more extensively when end-user customizability is desired. The script engine is optional when using the development platform. The application can instead register its own notification function (similar to I/Forms for Windows) to handle all DM/DB Access windows input.
3.2.1 Visual Interface API

The Visual Interface (VI) API supports the processing of applications and scripts, controls the appearance of pulldown menus, toolbars, and status bar, and handle the dynamic loading of DLLs. If the application prefers to use the Windows API, functions are available that return handles to menus, instances, MDI clients, and windows. All display functions load templates, if they are not already loaded, from libraries using the standard DM/DBA library search sequence. The library list lets applications easily plug in replacement modules based on runtime conditions at any level. (For example, a runtime replacement of a single menu palette on a pulldown menu, or a single dialog box, or a single script.) For a complete description of the VI API, see the DB Access Programmers Guide or online script help from the Edit Script dialog.
3.3 Handling Events

DM/DB Access offers several levels of event handling by using scripts and the user-registered notification function. Scripts at each level (gadgets, components, and application) are optional, but you must either supply a script or call VI_register_user_notify() to handle user input. DM/DB Access processes events in the following order: 1. 2. 3. 4. Call the application script. Call the gadget script. Call the component (palette, toolbar, or dialog box) script. Call the user notify function.
3.4 Accessing the Application Builder

To access the Application Builder, click on the first icon on the Toolbar.
3-6
Application Builder
Use the File pulldown menu to select Open, New Default, or New Blank.
Open
The Open command lets you load any application component for editing or processing.
New Default
The New Default command gives you a choice of a new application component with default components.
New Blank
The New Default command gives you a choice of a new empty application component.
3-8
Application Builder
Creating a Palette
Select the File pulldown menu and select New Blank, then Palette and the Edit Palette dialog appeara.
Double click on the dialog and the Palettes dialog appears.
Name Name of the palette.
Description Description of the palette.
Title Title of the palette. The title appears on the menu bar, or on the parent palette if this is a cascading palette.
Palette Script The name of the script is invoked each time you choose a command from the palette.
Initial Script The name of the script is invoked each time the palette is displayed.
Commands The lists of the commands that make up the palette. Up Moves the current command up one position in the list. Down Moves the current command down one position in the list. Reset Clears the current command; so that subsequent adds go to the bottom of the list. Drop Delete the current command. Edit Edit/view the parameters of the current command. Add Adds a new command above the current command, or at the bottom of the list if there is no current command.
Creating a Toolbar
Select the File pulldown menu and select New Blank, then Toolbar and the Toolbar dialog appears.
3 - 10
Application Builder
Double click on the dialog and the Toolbar dialog appears.
Name The name of the toolbar.
Description The description of the toolbar.
Height The height of the toolbar. Script The name of the script is invoked each time a button on the toolbar is selected.
Creating a Status bar

Select the File pulldown menu and select New Blank, then Status bar and the Status bar dialog appears.
Double click on the dialog and the Status bar dialog appears.
Name The name of the status bar.
Description The description of the status bar.
Typeface The typeface that you choose for the status bar fields.
Size The body size that you choose for the staus bar fields.
Bold A check box determining whether the status bar text is bolded.
Italic A check box determining whether the status bar text is italicized.
Height The height of the status bar.
Percentages The percentage of the total each status bar field occupies. These numbers must total 100.
3 - 12
Application Builder
Creating a Application
Select the File pulldown menu and select New Blank, then Application and the Blank dialog appears.
Double click on the dialog and the Application Styles dialog appears.
Name The name of the application.
Description The description of the application.
Title The title of the application. This text appears on the title bar.
Toolbar The toolbar to be attached to the application.
Statusbar The name of the status bar to be attached to the application.
Initial Script A script that is invoked whenever the application runs (using the -a command line option or calling VIapp_display.)
Close Script A script that is invoked when the application is closed.
Minimize A check box that determines whether the application has a minimize control. Maximize A check box that determines whether the application has a maximize control. Vertical Scrollbar A check box that determines whether the application has a vertical scroll bar, so that the client region can be scrolled vertically.
Horizontal Scrollbar A check box that determines whether the application has a vertical scroll bar, so that the client region can be scrolled horizontally. Control Menu A check box that determines whether the application has a control menu, so that common window commands can be accessed.
X Origin This value can be keyed in, or the window will automatically.
Y Origin This value can be keyed in, or the window will automatically.
Width This value can be dragged or resized to the desired location or size.
Height This value can be dragged or resized to the desired location or size.
Menus A list of menu bar palettes for the current application. When new palettes are selected, they are added above the current palette, or at the bottom of the list.
3 - 14
Application Builder
Dialogs 4 - 1
Dialogs
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4-2
Dialogs
Dialogs 4 - 3
4.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Dialogs
A dialog consists of gadgets placed on a form. A gadget is any field, button, text, and so on that you can place on a dialog. Most of the gadgets that you can place using the Dialog Builder are found on the Database Edit dialog. If you have used Database Edit, you are familiar with the types of gadgets you can use to design your own dialogs. For more information, see these sections: 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 Dialog Types Dialog Design Considerations Dialog Scripts Accessing the Dialog Builder Processing Dialogs
4.1 Dialog Types

The Dialog Builder provides several options for loading and customizing dialogs. You can select a default dialog, which has the functionality of the Database Edit dialog, or a blank dialog. The dialog loaded can be a Database dialog (associated with a specific schema.table combination) or a No Database dialog. A No Database dialog can be processed on any table or can have no database functionality such as a main dialog.
4.1.1 Default Dialogs

The New Default command in the Dialog Builder creates a dialog with the functionality of the Database Edit dialog. The following is a default dialog.
4-4
Dialogs
The following sections list the default dialog gadgets. You can place these gadgets, as well as others not available on a default dialog, by selecting Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) from the Dialog Builder panel dialog. Then select the appropriate command group button (Database Utilities, Graphic Utilities, General Utilities, or Cosmetic Graphics). For more information see the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder).
4.1.1.1 Database Utilities Gadgets

The following Database Utilities gadgets are placed on a default dialog. If the gadget is part of a command sub-group, the sub-group is listed in parentheses. For example, to place a multiple column field, you must select Place Gadget, Database Utilities (the command group), Column (the command sub-group), and Multiple Column. Schema Select Table Select Current Row Text (Current Row) Multiple Column (Column)
Dialogs 4 - 5
Current Row Slider (Current Row) Previous Row (Current Row) Next Row (Current Row) Pick Row (Current Row) Initialize Query (Query) Edit Query (Query) Process Query (Query) Add Query (Override Key-in Mode) AND/OR Toggle (Query) Relational Operator (Query) Change All (Override Key-in Mode)
Change Row (Override Key-in Mode) Delete All (Delete) Delete Row (Delete) Review (Report) Insert Row Single Report (Report) Update Active (Override Key-in Mode) Edit Code Fields On/Off Update Row Restore Defaults
4.1.1.2 Graphic Utilities

The following Graphic Utilities gadgets are placed on a default dialog. Review Element Locate Graphics Attach DB Linkage Linkage Mode Attach DAP Link Remove Linkage Remove Fence
4.1.1.3 General Utilities

The Cancel button from the General Utilities command group is placed on a default dialog.
4.1.2 Blank Dialogs

The Load Blank command in the Dialog Builder creates a blank dialog.
4-6
Dialogs
The following General Utilities gadgets are included on a blank dialog: OK button Cancel button Do not delete the Cancel button, unless you replace it with another Cancel or Exit button. If you process a dialog that has no Cancel or Exit button, there is no way to dismiss the dialog.
4.2 Dialog Design Considerations

Before you create a custom dialog you should consider how the dialog will be used. Do you need: Access to one database or several databases, one table or several tables? Should access to certain columns be restricted? Read-only or read/write access to the databases? Should you be able to delete, insert, or change rows? To generate reports or review a listing of the data? Access to information from more than one table at the same time? To execute CLIX or MicroStation commands from the dialog? To create and/or manipulate linkages between graphics files and databases? A default dialog is a good starting point for building a custom dialog. You can edit gadgets, delete unneeded gadgets, and place new gadgets to give the dialog the functionality required. You can also build a custom dialog from a blank dialog or load an existing dialog from a template library.
4.3 Dialog Scripts

You can further customize any dialog by associating the dialog or a gadget on that dialog with a script. Scripts are C-like statements that can call DB Access, standard C, I/Forms, I/NFM, or RIS functions. Although standard Dialog Builder commands meet most dialog creation needs, scripting provides a greater level of flexibility and control. You can: Create, edit, and test scripts, then save them to a template library through the Edit Script command. Specify a script to execute whenever a dialog is invoked (using the Dialog Script option) or notified (using the Notify Script option) through the Edit Dialog Parameters command.
Dialogs 4 - 7
Specify scripts to execute before and/or after a gadget is processed through the Gadget Characteristics command. Place a gadget associated with a specific script through the Script command.
4.4 Accessing the Dialog Builder

To access the Dialog Builder, click on the second icon on the Toolbar menu.
The DBA Dialog Builder Toolbox appears on the screen, which can be moved or minimized.
4-8
Dialogs
4.4.1 Dialog Builder Toolbox

When you access the Dialog Builder, the following Toolbox appears.
Text Box This command places a Text Box button on the current dialog, for text entry/display. Multi-Column Field This command places a Multi-Column Field button on the current dialog, for multi-column text entry/selection/display. List Box This command places a List Box button on the current dialog, for text selection. Grid This command places a Grid on the current dialog, for multi-column text selection. Combo Box This command places a Combo Box on the current dialog. Field Plus This command places a Field Plus on the current dialog. A Field Plus gadget is a custom control that offers full I/Forms functionality. Check Box/Radio Button This command places a Checklist Box or Radio Button on the current dialog, to display parameter states (on/off).
Dialogs 4 - 9
Button This command places a text, bitmap or symbol button. Symbol This command places a Symbol or Bitmap on the current dialog. Scrollbar This command places a Scrollbar that can display a range of values. You can use scripts to define the function or read the value of the scrollbar. Slider This command places a Slider that can display a range of values. You can use scripts to define the function or read the value of the slider. Text This command places Text annotation on the current dialog. Group Box This command places a Group Box on the current dialog to group a set of like-functioned gadgets. Spin Box This command places a Spin Box on the current dialog for cycling through a range of values. Rectangle This command places a Rectangle on the current dialog. You can select line weight, and line style. Line This command places a Line which the user can change the line weight and/or line style. Gauge This command places a Gauge that can display a percentage (from 1 to 100). Dial This command places a Dial that can display a range of values.
4.5 Processing Dialogs

You can access the Process Dialog command from the Dialogs area of the DB Access main dialog or from the Dialog Builder bar menu. This command lets you test gadgets on the current dialog to see if they are working properly. See the section Process Dialog.
4 - 10
Dialogs
Reports 5 - 1
Reports
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5-2
Reports
Reports 5 - 3
5.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Reports
DB Access lets you create, load, modify, and save report templates. You can specify the layout of different types of lines and fields within the report template. When the template is processed, DB Access reads information from a relational database, ASCII file, binary file, or element list file and formats it to your specifications. For more information, see these sections: 5.1 5.2 5.3 Report Types Accessing the Report Builder Processing Reports
5.1 Report Types

The Report Builder provides several options for creating reports. You can define templates to report on database tables, ASCII files, binary files, or user data in design files. Blank and default reports are available for all four report types. The four report types are: Database reports Loads a default template, a blank template, or an existing template from a template library. ASCII reports Creates an ASCII structure template or loads an existing ASCII report template from a template library. See the section Define Structure. Binary reports Creates a binary structure template or loads an existing binary report template from a template library. See the section Define Structure. User data reports Creates a user data structure template or loads an existing user data report template from a template library. See the section Define Structure.
5.1.1 Default Reports

The New Default (Report Builder) command reads the structure of the attached database or structure and generates a default report template for the selected table. You can select columns to be included in or excluded from the default template when it is loaded. The following is the default report template for the manufacturer table in the sample database.
5-4
Reports
In a report template, the column on the left indicates the line type. A represents alphanumeric data, I represents integer data, F represents floatingpoint data, D represents derived field, and C represents a coded column field. The number of As, Is, Fs, Ds, or Cs represents the field length for the column in the database. A default template has the following characteristics: Sort criteria One sort key (the first selected column of the table) Top lines Title line (the table name) Date, Time, and Page line Column Header lines (underlined column names) Body lines Detail line. Printed once for each row in the input universe, it contains the selected columns. You can specify 1 to 2000 characters per line for the default report on the Edit Report Parameters dialog. If the selected columns overrun the current characters per line, the line is extended to fit all selected columns. In addition, the line contains a counter field which counts rows and resets when sort key 1 breaks or changes.
Reports 5 - 5
Subtotal line. Printed when sort key 1 breaks; it totals, prints, and resets the counter field and totals, prints, and resets any numeric columns included in the report. Final line The system totals and prints the counter field, and totals and prints any numeric columns included in the report in this line. For more information, see the section New Default (Report Builder).
5.1.2 Blank Reports

The New Blank (Report Builder) command loads a blank report template for a selected table. Unrelated Tables loads a blank template that lets you report on tables that have no relationship. A blank report contains no lines or fields. You can design a template with the features and functionality needed.
5.1.2.1 Unrelated Tables Reports

To report on tables that do not share join columns, you must create an unrelated tables report. Possible reports on unrelated tables include reports in which preface information comes from one table and body information from another. You must place one or more Single Table lines for each table on the report template. Fields for a table must be placed on a line associated with that table. Common lines, such as page headings, are placed on All Tables lines. You must set up separate sorts for each table in the report.
5-6
Reports
For more information, see these sections Join Columns, New Blank (Report Builder), and Modify Sort.
5.2 Accessing the Report Builder

To access the Report Builder, click on the third icon on the Toolbar dialog.
The Report Builder dialog displays on top of the DB Access main dialog.
DB Access loads the Report Builder menu bar.
5.3 Processing Reports

You can access the Process Report command from the Reports area of the DB Access main dialog. This command lets you process report templates that have been created in the Report Builder. For more information see section Process Reports.
Edit Script 6 - 1
Edit Script
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6-2
Edit Script
Edit Script 6 - 3
6.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Edit Script
The Edit Script button on the DB Access main dialog calls the Edit Script dialog. The Edit Script dialog lets you create or edit scripts. All major functions designed for runtime users can be manipulated by scripts. In addition, System commands can be included within scripts. Scripting assumes a knowledge of the C programming language. In fact, the structure of a script is in the form of a C function. For descriptions of supported functions, see the DB Access Programmers Guide or the c:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc\script.doc file.
Dialog Options
When you select Edit Script, the Edit Script dialog appears.
Name Specifies the name of the script. The name of the script template must be the same as the function name.
6-4
Edit Script
Description Contains a description of the script (up to 50 characters). Load from ASCII file Specifies the name of an ASCII file to load. You can edit the file and save it as a script. Save to ASCII file Specifies the name of an ASCII file to contain the current script. Scripts saved as ASCII files can be printed. Debugger A check box that determines whether the Script Debugger is off or on. When the toggle is set to On, a Debugger icon appears on the screen. For more information, see the section Script Debugger. Store Compiled Scripts A check box that determines whether the compiled version of the script is stored in the template library. When the toggle is set to On, the compiled script is stored in the template library so that it does not have to be recompiled each time the application is invoked. When the toggle is set to Off, the script is not stored in the template library and is recompiled each time the application is invoked. Load Script Calls the Load from Library dialog. You can select a script from the list of available script templates. For more information, see the section Load From Library. Check Script Displays a Script Errors form that displays any detected errors and the line numbers where the errors were detected. (Usually an error is detected somewhere just after it occurs.) If you select an error line in the Script Errors form, the cursor moves to the point in the script (on the Edit Script dialog) where the error was detected. Save Script Calls the Save Template dialog. You can save the current script as a template in the current template library. For more information, see the section Save Options. Options Calls the Script Options dialog, which is described in the following section. Text field Displays the current script. When the Edit Script dialog first appears, this field is in edit mode. You can key in a script or edit one that has been loaded. Clear Clears the text field on the Edit Script dialog. It also clears the delete buffer. Delete Puts the text field in delete mode; any script statement you select is deleted and stored in a delete buffer. The delete buffer stores deleted lines until you exit delete mode or select Clear. Select Delete again to exit delete mode. Undelete Inserts the current delete buffer at the marker (highlighted) line in the text field. If no marker line exists, the delete buffer is inserted at the bottom of the text.
Edit Script 6 - 5
Select a line to make it a marker line. The text field cannot be in delete or edit mode. (That is, the Delete, Undelete, and Edit buttons are not depressed.) Edit This button places the text field in edit mode. You can key in or edit scripts. Use Editor This button invokes the preferred editor (defined by the EDITOR environment variable). If EDITOR is not defined, Notepad is the default editor. The name of the current editor appears in the field to the right of the Use Editor button. To change editors, select and clear this field, and key in the name of the new editor.
Options Button
When you select the Script Options button, the Script Options dialog appears.
Run Current Script This button runs the current script in the editor and accepts any arguments. Some scripts, such as one that requires input from a dialog, cannot run with this command. The Arguments field is used to place any literal arguments that normally appear inside the parentheses of a function call. Separate the literal arguments with commas, but do not key in the parentheses. Delete Globals This button deletes all global variables from memory. This is useful if you need to change a global type. Run Initial Script By default, this button runs the script specified by DBA_INITIAL_SCRIPT. You can specify another script in the Initial Script field. (Initial scripts can be used to initialize global variables and require no arguments.) This button also deletes all global variables. Verbose Errors and Warnings The gadgets in this area let you manipulate verbose error checking mode. Use of this mode eliminates the need to check status returns in script function calls.
6-6
Edit Script
Edit Settings. This button calls the Verbose Error Settings dialog, which lets you select which function types undergo verbose error checking (standard C, DB Access, I/Forms, I/NFM, RIS, or all). These settings can be saved and loaded as design options. For more information see the section Save Options. Off/On. This toggle turns verbose error checking mode off or on.
Script Debugger
The Script Debugger is a troubleshooting tool for scripts. You can use the Script Debugger to: Set breakpoints to stop a script at specified points in processing. Review the variables associated with a script. Set values for these variables. Set verbose error checking mode options. Return to the Edit Script dialog.
Script Debugger Dialog Options

The Script Debugger dialog is invoked from the Edit Script dialog. When you set the Debugger toggle to On, a Debugger icon appears on the screen. You can move the icon by pressing and holding the mouse button and moving the mouse.
When any dialogs associated with the Script Debugger are collapsed, a Debugger icon appears on the screen. Select the icon to uncollapse the Script Debugger dialog.
Edit Script 6 - 7
Edit Script This button returns you to the Edit Script dialog. The last script function displayed in the Script Debugger text field appears in the Edit Script text field. Single Step This button steps to the next line of the script code being debugged. Any function called is executed. Step Into When a script calls a user-defined script function, this button displays the called function. Execution stops on the first line of the called function. Step Into acts as a single step on button functions and dynamically loaded functions. Breakpoints This button calls the Set/Review Breakpoints dialog. For more information, see the section Set/Review Breakpoints. Go This button runs the script to completion or to the next breakpoint. Continue This button runs the current function to completion. Execution stops on the line of script following the point where the function is called. Variables This button calls the Review Variables dialog. For more information, see the section Review Variables. Abort This button stops execution of the current script and any other gadget processing which is pending.
6-8
Edit Script
Visual Script Trace This toggle turns the Visual Script Trace on and off. When the toggle is On, the debugger displays functions as they are called, highlighting the line being executed. Break on Script Gadget This toggle sets the Break on Script switch. When the toggle is On and a gadget (or report line, dialog script, or notify script) that has an associated script is activated, the debugger becomes uncollapsed. Script processing is suspended just as if a breakpoint had been set. Verbose Errors and Warnings The gadgets in this area let you manipulate verbose error checking mode. Use of this mode eliminates the need to check status returns in script function calls. Edit Settings. This button calls the Verbose Error Settings dialog, which lets you select which function types undergo verbose error checking (standard C, DB Access, I/Forms, I/NFM, RIS, or all). These settings can be saved and loaded as design options (see the section Save Options). Off/On. This toggle turns verbose error checking mode off or on. Breakpoints This toggle turns all breakpoints on (Enabled) or off (Disabled) without calling the Set/Review Breakpoints dialog. This does not affect the automatic break on gadget/line scripts. Name This field specifies the script function being debugged. Description This field contains a description of the script function.
Edit Script 6 - 9
Set/Review Breakpoints
When you select Breakpoints from the Script Debugger dialog, the Set/Review Breakpoints dialog appears.
Break on Function This field displays the script templates available from the current library. You can select functions from this list. Script processing stops when a selected function is called. Clear All Breakpoints This button clears all functions and line breakpoints. Undo Changes This button resets all breakpoints to the way they were when the Set/Review Breakpoints dialog was invoked. Function This field specifies which functions line breakpoints appear in the Break on Line field. You can key in a function or select one using the list indicator. Edit Line Breakpoints This button starts Add/Remove Line Breakpoints mode. In this mode, you can select lines displayed in the Script Debugger dialog text field to add them as line breakpoints (displayed in the Break on Line field). You can remove the line breakpoint by deselecting the line (that is, selecting the line a second time) on the Script Debugger dialog. Delete Line Breakpoints This button removes line breakpoints from lines in the Break on Line field. Select Delete Line Breakpoints. Then select the lines to remove breakpoints.
6 - 10
Edit Script
Break on Line This field specifies the lines of a function on which the Script Debugger stops processing.
Review Variables
When you select Variables from the Script Debugger dialog, the Review Variables dialog appears.
Function This field specifies which functions variables are currently displayed. You can key in a function or select one using the list indicator. Name This field specifies the name of the variable. Type This field gives the type of the variable, its level of indirection, if its an array and the numbers and sizes of dimensions. Value This field specifies the value of the variable. Most pointers are displayed as two integers separated by a colon. Some pointers, such as dba_errtxt, appear as a single integer. To change a variables value, position the cursor on the value to be changed and key in a new value.
Template Librarian 7 - 1
Template Librarian
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
7-2
Template Librarian
7.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Template Librarian
The Template Librarian (templib) is a standalone utility. It is an integrated part of the administrator which provides many of the features of templib, DB Access template libraries. You can use the Template Librarian to: List the templates in a specified template library. Copy templates from one template library to another. Extract a template into a text file (only available from templib). Delete a template. Compress a template library to recover space after templates have been replaced or deleted. The Template Librarian is an embedded DBA application. Most of the code behind it are scripts. These dialogs and scripts can be customized and added to by the user.
Accessing the Template Librarian

To access the Template Librarian, click on the fifth icon on the Toolbar dialog.
7-4
Template Librarian
The Template Librarian screen appears.
Before you can copy, delete, or move libraries, you must select the libraries necessary for the operation. To select one library, just click on it. To select more than one, hold the Ctrl key down when using the mouse.
Copy Libraries
To copy a library select Template and then select Copy from the pulldown menu.
When Copy is selected the Copy dialog appears.
Copy selected templates to The name of the library to copy to. If it does not exist, you are prompted to create it. Browse The Browse button can be used to activate the standard Open dialog to search for the library to copy to. Replace templates The Replace templates option must be checked for a DBA existing template to be overwritten.
Move Libraries
To move a library select Template and then select Move from the pulldown menu.
When Move is selected the Move dialog appears.
Move selected templates to The name of the library to move to. If it does not exist, you are prompted to create it. Browse The Browse button can be used to activate the standard Open dialog to search for the library to move to. Replace templates The Replace templates option must be checked for a DBA existing template to be overwritten.
7-6
Template Librarian
Delete
When you select Template, then Delete, a confirmation dialog box displays.
Undelete
To retrieve previous versions of a template or recover a template that has been deleted, you first have to see the deleted/modified templates. Then choose the templates to undelete. (The Undelete command is disabled until this point). Select Undelete, the template is moved from the Deleted list and becomes visible again when you do another Show Deleted (to turn the mode off). If there is already a nondeleted template in the library with the same name and type, it becomes deleted (they are basically swapped). All deleted templates are permanently removed (and do not show up in the deleted list) if a Compress is performed on the template library.
Select All
When you select Template, then Select All, the template librarian marks everything in the Current List of Templates.
Unselect All
When you select Template, then Unselect All, the template librarian undoes the Select All command.
Template Types
To see the template types, select View and then select Template Type from the pulldown menu.
7-8
Template Librarian
When you select Template Types, the Template Types Filter dialog appears.
This is used to control what types of templates are shown in the Template List.
Sort By
To sort a library select View and then select Sort By from the pulldown menu.
When the Sort By is selected the Sort By dialog appears.
Show Deleted
To look at the deleted templates, select View and then select Show Deleted from the pulldown menu.
When you select Show Deleted, a list of deleted templates dialog appears.
Compress
To compress the library, select Tools and then select Compress from the pulldown menu.
7 - 10
Template Librarian
This command only affects the current library. This permanently removes any deleted templates.
Bulk Compile
To do a bulk script compile, select Tools and then select Bulk Compile from the pulldown menu.
When you select Bulk Compile, the Bulk Script Compiler dialog appears.
This compiles all script templates in all the libraries in the DBA_LIB_LIST into stored script objects. For information see the section Store Compiled Scripts and Object libraries. If any of the scripts do not compile, use the Review Errors button to view any errors.
Cross Reference
To generate a cross reference report, select Tools and then select Cross Reference from the pulldown menu.
When you select Cross Reference, the Cross Reference dialog appears.
Object Template Library This field has the library name that is created in the bulk script compile command. Report Output Filename This is what the report file is named. Report Description This field gives you a description of the report to be run. A cross reference report is really a DBA ASCII Report. You can choose which cross reference you want to generate: FUNCTION_REF Lists each function and indicates which scripts call it. FUNC_SYMBOL_DUMP Lists each function, along with all automatic variables, and global variables for each function name.
7 - 12
Template Librarian
GLOBAL_REF Lists each global variable and indicates which scripts reference them. INCLUDE_REF Lists each include file/include template and which scripts include them. All these reports can be customized and new ones added. For more information see the file c:\win32app\ingr\dba\support\tl.tlb.
Bitmap Loader 8 - 1
Bitmap Loader
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
8-2
Bitmap Loader
Bitmap Loader 8 - 3
8.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Bitmap Loader
The Bitmap Loader utility allows standard.bmp images to be loaded from the disk and stored in your Template Library.
Accessing the Bitmap Loader

To access the Bitmap utility, click on the sixth icon on the Toolbar menu.
The Bitmap Loader screen appears.
Name Template name to be created. Filename Full path of the .bmp file (or select Browse.) Description Template description. Apply Loads the .bmp file specified by the current filename for saving.
8-4
Bitmap Loader
Cancel Exits the Bitmap Loader. Browse Displays the Open File dialog for selecting .bmp files. Save Saves the current bitmap into the template library (Apply is required first.) The following steps need to be follow when using the Bitmap Loader: 1. 2. 3. Key in filename of .bmp file or Browse. Apply to view bitmap. Save to template library as desired.
OR
Select Bitmap templates from load from library dialog for viewing. Once bitmaps have been added to the template library, they can be placed on toolbars and dialogs.
Database Edit 9 - 1
Database Edit
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
9-2
Database Edit
Database Edit 9 - 3
9.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Database Edit
The Database Edit function lets you review, add, delete, or modify rows in an attached relational database. You can manipulate individual rows or a universe of rows. You can process report templates from Database Edit. For more information, see these sections: 9.1 9.2 9.3 Accessing Database Edit Creating and Using Query Criteria Editing Database Values
9.1 Accessing Database Edit

When you select Utilities from the DB Access menu bar, the pulldown menu appears. Select the Database Edit command and the Database Edit dialog appears. If a schema and table are active, the column list for the table is displayed. If there is not a schema present enter one in the schema field and press the Return key. The schema is attached, and you can select a table in the table field.
9-4
Database Edit
Initialize Query This button initializes (clears) the current query criteria. For more information, see sections Creating and Using Query Criteria and Initialize Query (Database Edit). Edit Query This button lets you edit or save the current query criteria, or load a query criteria template from a template library. For more information, see sections Creating and Using Query Criteria and Edit Query (Database Edit). Process Query This button finds all rows in the current table that meet the query criteria. If no query criteria exists, Process Query returns all rows in the current table. For more information see sections, Creating and Using Query Criteria and Process Query (Database Edit). Current Row This area lets you determine which row in the universe is current. For more information, see the section Current Row (Database Edit). Add Query This area is used to set up query criteria, values used to search the database for rows with common information. For more information, see sections Creating and Using Query Criteria and Add Query (Database Edit). Edit Code This button lets you display, edit, and insert new code list values in a code list. You can also add a code list value to the current row. For more information, see sections DB Access Reserved Tables. Restore Defaults This button restores the default values of the displayed columns. It erases the display of the current row. For more information, see the section Restore Defaults (Database Edit). Change All This button lets you change the value for one or more columns for all rows in the current universe. For more information, see sections Editing Database Values and Change All (Database Edit). Delete All This button deletes all rows in the current universe from the database upon verification. For more information, see the section Delete All (Database Edit). Fields On/Off This button toggles all column fields off or on. Off fields are not included in universe reviews. You can toggle individual fields on or off by selecting the column name for the field on the Database Edit dialog. For more information, see the section Fields On/Off (Database Edit). Review This button generates a formatted column-by-column listing of the current universe. For more information, see the section Review (Database Edit). Report This button calls the Process Reports dialog, which lets you load and process a report template. You can list the report output to the screen or print the output file. For more information, see the section Report (Database Edit). Key Column This button puts the dialog in key column mode, which overrides the key-in mode for database fields. For more information, see the section Key Column (Database Edit).
Database Edit 9 - 5
Change Row This button puts the dialog in change row mode, which overrides the key-in mode for key column, add query, and update active fields. For more information, see sections Editing Database Values and Change Row (Database Edit). Delete Row This button deletes the current row from the database upon verification. For more information, see the section Delete Row (Database Edit). Update Active This button lets you enter data in the multiple column field which is used in creating a new row. Select Insert Row to insert the displayed data as a row in the database. For more information, see the section Update Active (Database Edit). Insert Row This button inserts a new row in the database, based on the currently displayed column values. You can select Update Active, enter the column values you want for a row, and select Insert Row to create the new row. For more information, see sections Insert Row (Database Edit) and Update Active (Database Edit). Update Row This button updates the current row based on the currently displayed columns values. For more information, see the section Update Row (Database Edit).
9.2 Creating and Using Query Criteria

Database Edit lets you build query criteria to search a database table for rows with common column values. For example, you might want to search the parts table for all tires made by a particular manufacturer, or all tires of a certain size and price range. The set of rows that match the query criteria is called a universe of rows.
9.2.1 Using Query Functions

The following is a suggested sequence for clearing, creating, and processing query criteria. In this example, the parts table is current. This example creates query criteria to search for 15-inch tires with a price of less than 100 dollars by: Using a substring search (!!) relational operator for the mfr_name field to limit the query to manufacturers of tires. The two manufacturers in the database that produce tires (GoodTire and Armstrong Tires) have the character string Tire in their names. Using a substring search relational operator for the description1 field to limit the size of the tires to 15. Using the less than ( < ) relational operator for the price field to search for tires that cost less than 100 dollars. Selecting the AND function to find only the tires that meet all the criteria.
9-6
Database Edit
Operating Sequence
1. Select Initialize Query from the Database Edit dialog to clear any existing query criteria. The message Query initialized appears. 2. Create a query criteria. a. Select Add Query. The Add Query button appears to be depressed. The dialog is in Add Query mode. Any edits to the column values of the current row are added as query criteria and do not change the database. b. c. Set the AND/OR toggle to AND. Select the list indicator on the relational operators field. Select the substring search ( !! ) operator from the displayed list. Select the mfr_name column field. Clear the column field and key in Tire. The message Query added appears. 3. 4. Repeat the process to add a substring search for 15 in the description1 field. Add query criteria in the price field for less than ( < ) 100. (This requires you to select a new relational operator.) Select Edit Query to review the query criteria. The Edit Query dialog displays the query criteria. The query criteria should resemble the following:
d.
5.
a.
If there are errors in the query criteria, select the appropriate line and make the needed edits. Select OK to accept the query criteria and to exit the Edit Query dialog.
b.
Database Edit 9 - 7
6.
Select Process Query to process the query criteria. The system displays the message Found nn "parts" row(s) and displays the first row in the universe.
7.
Use the Current Row functions to page through the universe, or select Review to see a formatted listing of the universe.
9.3 Editing Database Values

You can use Database Edit to change most column values in a database. By default, the multiple column field on the Database Edit dialog is in change row mode. To update a value in the current row, select the appropriate column field and key in a new value. The row is automatically updated in the database. Exceptions to this process include: If a dialog contains add query, update active, or key column fields, you must select Change Row to change the associated value. For more information, see the section Change Row (Database Edit). You cannot edit a serial column value in an INFORMIX database by keying in a new value. You cannot use the Change Row command to change serial column values. If you convert serial columns to integer columns, you should be able to modify their values through DB Access. You cannot enter duplicate values in a column used for unique row identification (mslink, mscatalog.key column, or unique index). For more information, see the section DB Access Reserved Tables. To change one or more column values for all rows in the current universe, use the Change All command. For more information, see the section Change All (Database Edit).
9-8
Database Edit
SQL Statements 10 - 1
SQL Statements
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
10 - 2
SQL Statements
10.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
SQL Statements
The SQL Statements button on the DB Access main dialog calls the SQL Statements dialog. You can enter and process SQL statements, and save them as templates. You can load SQL templates to process or edit. You can load an ASCII file to edit and process. In general, you should use the SQL Statements dialog to process Data Manipulation Language (DML) statements (such as delete, insert, select, and update). Use the RIS Schema Manager in the Schema Edit utility for functions performed by Data Definition Language (DDL) statements (such as create, alter, and drop). The Structured Query Language (SQL) is an ANSI standard language for creating and manipulating databases. For information on RIS-supported SQL statements, see the Relational Interface System (RIS) for Windows NT SQL Users Guide.
Dialog Options
When you select SQL Statements, the SQL Statements dialog appears.
SQL Statement Field This field specifies the current SQL statements. You can key in one or more statements. You can break a statement over more than one line by inserting a Return between words. If there are multiple SQL statements, terminate each statement with a semicolon (;).
10 - 4
SQL Statements
A single SQL statement
Multiple SQL statements Load ASCII This field lets you specify an ASCII file to be loaded. The contents of the file displays in the SQL Statement field. You can edit the display, process it, or save it as an SQL template. Editor This button invokes the preferred editor which is defined by the EDITOR environment variable. If EDITOR is not defined, Notepad is the default editor. The name of the current editor appears in the field to the right of the Editor button. To change editors, select and clear this field, and key in the name of the new editor. Load SQL This button calls the Load from Library dialog. You can select a template from the list of available SQL templates. For more information, see the section Load From Library. Save SQL This button calls the Save Template dialog. You can save the current SQL statements as a template in a template library. For more information, see the section Save Options. Apply This button executes the SQL statements. If you process an SQL select statement, the Database Edit dialog appears. Select Review to see a listing of the resulting universe, or select Process Query and use the Current Row functions to step through the universe a row at a time.
Clear This button clears the SQL Statement field. Close This button exits the SQL Statements.
10 - 6
SQL Statements
Schema Edit 11 - 1
Schema Edit
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
11 - 2
Schema Edit
Schema Edit 11 - 3
11.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Schema Edit
The Schema Edit on the DB Access menu bar gives a pulldown menu to choose the different options. You can create, modify, and drop schemas or tables, and grant or revoke RIS privileges.
11.1 Accessing Schema Edit

When you select Utilities from the DB Access menu bar, the pulldown menu appears.
RIS Schema Manager This button calls the RIS Schema Manager. You can create, review, and manipulate schemas and tables, and review and manipulate the schema file. For more information, see the section RIS Schema Manager. Create/Alter Table This button lets you create a new table or alter an existing one. For more information, see the section Create/Alter Table (Schema Edit). Drop Table This button lets you drop a table definition from the specified schema. For more information, see the section Drop Table (Schema Edit). Build Schema List This button lets you build a list of schemas for use with multiple-schema dialogs and reports. For more information, see the section Build Schema List (Schema Edit). Edit Relations This button lets you graphically depict relations between the tables in your database. For more information, see the section Edit Relations. Edit Privileges This button lets you grant or revoke table privileges for any available RIS schemas. For more information, see the section Edit Privileges (Schema Edit).
11 - 4
Schema Edit
DB Access Graphics 12 - 1
DB Access Graphics
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
12 - 2
DB Access Graphics
12.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
DB Access Graphics
DB Access provides two methods for working in graphics. Vector graphics Use MicroStation design files. Raster graphics All DM/View file formats are supported. For more information, see these sections: 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 DB Access Graphics Linkages. Database Edit Graphics Linkages Functions. DB Access/MicroStation Vector Graphics. DB Access Raster Graphics.
12.1 DB Access Graphics Linkages

DB Access lets you link rows in a database to elements in design files and raster files. In addition, you can create linkages between a raster file element and a text file, or between elements in the same raster file or different raster files. Database Linkages The Attach Linkage command links the current database row to an element in a design file or raster file. For more information, see these sections Database Edit Graphics Linkages Functions and Attach DB Linkage (Database Edit). The Attach DAP Link command links the current database row with a text node in a design file. For more information, see these sections Database Edit Graphics Linkages Functions and Attach DAP Link (Database Edit).
Attach DAP Link
12.2 Database Edit Graphics Linkages Functions

The Graphics Linkages buttons, on the lower right side of the Database Edit dialog, create and manipulate linkages in design or raster files. These buttons are enclosed by a dotted line in the following figure.
12 - 4
DB Access Graphics
Review Element This button reviews the linkages for a graphic element in a design or raster file. See the section Review Element (Database Edit). Attach Linkage This button creates a linkage that associates the current row with a graphic element in the design or raster file. See the section Attach DB Linkage (Database Edit). Attach DAP Linkage This button creates a linkage that associates the current row with a text node in the design file. This command works only in vector graphics. See the section Attach DAP Link (Database Edit). Remove Linkage This button lets you select a graphic element and remove any existing linkage. See the section Remove Linkage (Database Edit). Remove Fence This button lets you remove the linkages on any graphic elements contained within a fence you place. See the section Remove Fence (Database Edit). Locate Graphics This button locates the graphic element that is linked to the current row. If a linkage exists, DB Access locates the graphic element, centers it in the specified window, and highlights it. See the section Locate Graphics (Database Edit). Linkage Mode This field specifies the type of linkage created with the Attach Linkage function. The values for a linkage are New, Existing, Info, and None. See the section Attach DB Linkage (Database Edit). Delete Row This toggle determines if the database row associated with a graphic element is deleted when the linkage is removed. See sections Remove Linkage (Database Edit) and Remove Fence (Database Edit).
12.3 DB Access/MicroStation Vector Graphics

DB Access lets you create and manipulate linkages between database rows and elements in MicroStation vector images. Before linking database rows to graphics data in a MicroStation design file, you must create an mslink column for the tables containing those rows. The mslink column must have a unique value for each row. DB Access uses the mslink column to uniquely identify a row; MicroStation uses mslink to specify a database row that a graphics element is linked to. You can automatically create the mslink column and insert unique mslink values for each row with the Create/Alter Table function of the Schema Edit utility. For more information, see the section Create/Alter Table (Schema Edit).
12.3.1 Accessing DB Access from a MicroStation Design File Operating Sequence

1. Access the design file containing the elements for which you want to create or manipulate graphics linkages. You can enter the design file through the MicroStation Command Environment (mce <design.file>) or through any graphics application built on MicroStation. Invoke DB Access. Key in the following MicroStation start command:
start c:\win32app\ingr\dba\dba.exe
2.
The DB Access main dialog appears. DB Access attaches to the schema stored in DBA_SCHEMA or specified with the -s command-line option. If no schema is specified, the main dialog displays, but there is no current schema. If necessary, specify a schema in the Schema field. 3. Select a table from the Select Table screen on the right side of the DB Access main dialog. The table name highlights and is displayed in the Table field. 4. Select Database Edit. The Database Edit dialog appears.
12 - 6
DB Access Graphics
The graphics linkage buttons on the bottom right side of the dialog are active.
12.4 DB Access Raster Graphics

You can manipulate raster images in the DB Access environment. The raster files must be local or NFS mounted. All Database Edit graphics linkages function except Attach DAP Linkage can be performed on raster files. In addition, DB Access provides commands that are specific to raster graphics.
12.4.1 Workflow for Raster Graphics

Before you can manipulate raster images within DB Access, you must: 1. Create a control file in your working directory. The following is an example:
# # # # # # # # # # # This file is used to set up raster variables used by DB Access. To for DB Access to use this file you need to: export DBA_RASTER=/usr/ip32/dba/support/raster.ctl or set DBA_RASTER=c:\win32app\ingr\dba\support\raster.ctl Each user can make a copy of this file to their own directory and modify DBA_RASTER to point to their directory / file. Also note that everything is case sensitive.
# Window origin X1: 30 Y1: 10 # Width and Height of window Width: 400 Height: 400 # "Windows" mode of how the graphics windows will be displayed. # Valid values are: CASCADE or QUADRANT Windows: CASCADE # The offset values are used only if you have set the variable Windows # to CASCADE Offset_x: 10 Offset_y: 10 # # # # # # # # # # # # There is a little button menu that has some read only graphics functions like Fit, Window Area, Zoom In etc... The menu is displayed by the when the user types a "v". There are three valid "Menu" commands: PERMANENT Once the raster command menu is displayed it will stay displayed until the user hits the cancel button. POP_UP An soon as the user hits a button the menu will be erased. NONE The raster menu will not be displayed when the user hits the "v" key.
Menu: PERMANENT # Highlight, Foreground, Background, File_Link_Color, Note_Link_Color, # User_Link_Color, and Database_Link_Color control the colors of the # window and the DBA Links. # The valid colors are: # LIGHT CYAN 0 # DARK GRAY 1 # BLACK 2 # YELLOW 3 # LIGHT GRAY 4 # DARK CYAN 5 # WHITE 6 # LIGHT RED 7 # LIGHT GREEN 8 # LIGHT BLUE 9 # BROWN 10 # DARK RED 11 # DARK GREEN 12 # DARK BLUE 13 # DARK MAGENTA 14 # LIGHT MAGENTA 15 Highlight: 4 Foreground: 2 Background: 6 File_Link_Color: 11 Note_Link_Color: 9 User_Link_Color: 3 Database_Link_Color: 8
12 - 8
DB Access Graphics
# If you want the DB Access database redlines/links to be displayed # every time the graphics image is repainted set Auto_Display_links to # "ON" the default value is "OFF" Auto_Display_Links: OFF # You can specify the type of text redline font that you want to use. # The font should be one that is available on the machine you are running on. # Font: mono821b # Files_Table, Links_Table, Points_Table, and Strings_Table tells DB Access # the name of the tables that you want the graphics and redline info stored. # # # # Files_Table: Links_Table: Points_Table: Strings_Table: dba_files dba_links dba_points dba_strings
# If you want to save and load redlines from redlines file dbaccess needs # to know where to look for the redline files. If you do not set # the Redline_Path it will: # a) if you are on the clipper it will use the users current working # directory as the redline storage area. # b) if you are on the pc the default redline storage area will be read # from the dmredl.ini file found in your windows directory. # Redline_Path: /usr/redlines # Redline_Path: c:\usr\redlines # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # (on clipper) (on pc)
To be able to view database links between unix and dos, two global pointers have been set up. DB Access stores the original location of a file in the database (dba_files). When a user displays a file, that file is checked against dba_files table to see if it already has a file number assigned to it. DB Access checks for three file combination based on the previous pointers. 1) drive_path_filename to database 2) dba_files_path/filename to database 3) dba_files_drive/path_filename to database where drive_path_filename is: /usr/files/demo.tg4 or c:\files\demo.tg4 where dba_files_path is: /usr/files or c:\files where dba_files_drive is: /usr or c If after three attempts to make a match fail, a new entry is put into the database.
# Files_Path: c:\usr\files # Files_Drive: c # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # Redline_Mode variable will have an effect on the following "dba standard buttons": Draw Arc Draw Arrow Draw Circle Draw Ellipse Draw Filled Circle Draw Filled Ellipse Draw Filled Rectangle Draw Filled Shape Draw Freehand Draw Line Draw Rectangle Draw Shape Draw Symbol Draw Text Copy Redline Delete Redline Move Redline Select Redline Undo Redline
* ** ** ** * ** *
Draw Freehand, Draw Symbol and Select Redline only work on the pc version of dba. Copy, Delete, Move, and Undo redlines only work on dm redlines. They will NOT work on dba database redlines.
**
If Redline_Mode is set to 0, then the previous dba buttons will do DM/Redline calls so you can save your redlines to a file. If Redline_Mode is set to 1, then all redlines from the previous buttons will be to the database.
Redline_Mode: 0 # The Plot_Queue is used on the Clipper only. You use this variable to # specify which queue you want the displayed graphics to be plotted to. # Plot_Queue: laser # Graphics window information only used on pc DBA Graphics_Window_x: 10 Graphics_Window_y: 10 Graphics_Window_Width: 550 Graphics_Window_Height: 450
All keywords in the control file are optional, but the control file must exist. If you want to use only the default values, you can create an empty control file. An example control file, c:\win32app\ingr\dba\support\raster.ctl, is delivered with DB Access. You can copy this file to your working directory and edit it.
12 - 10
DB Access Graphics
2.
Set the DBA_RASTER environment variable to the control file you created. For example:
set DBA_RASTER=raster.ctl
This user variable can also be set in the Control Panel - System. 3. 4. Determine the raster images to be used. You must know the full pathnames of the files. Select or create a schema to be used. The schema must have the following tables: dba_links, dba_files, and dba_points. Linkages with raster graphics data are stored in these tables. When you use the Create/Alter Table utility in Schema Edit to create these tables, DB Access automatically adds the correct column names for you.
12.4.1.1 DB Access Raster Graphics Dialog

The default raster graphics dialog delivered with DB Access is dba_g_menu. It can be displayed by pressing the letter v for view.
The following are available on the Raster Graphics Dialog: Window Area This button displays the area specified by two points. For more information, see the section Window Area (Raster Graphics). Fit This button displays an entire document in the specified window. For more information, see the section Fit (Raster Graphics). Update This button refreshes the selected window. For more information, see the section Update (Raster Graphics). Pan This button moves the window area in the direction of the cursor position. For more information, see the section Pan (Raster Graphics). Erase Fence This button erases the selected fence in the raster image in the specified window. For more information, see the section Erase Fence (Raster Graphics). Cancel This button dismisses the selected operation. For more information, see the section Cancel (Raster Graphics).
Window Scroll This button moves the window area from one specified point to another. For more information, see the section Window Scroll (Raster Graphics). Zoom In This button displays half as much of the specified file at twice the resolution. For more information, see the section Zoom In (Raster Graphics). Show Links This button displays existing links in the selected window. For more information, see the section Show Links (Raster Graphics). Measure This button lets you determine the distance between two points in a raster image. For more information, see the section Measure (Raster Graphics). Fence Block This button lets you select a portion of the raster image in the specified window. For more information, see the section Fence Block (Raster Graphics). Load File This button displays the specified raster file. For more information, see the section Load File (Raster Graphics). Window Center This button brings the selected point of the raster image to the center of the window area. For more information, see the section Window Center (Raster Graphics). Zoom Out This button displays twice as much of the specified file at half the resolution. For more information, see the section Zoom Out (Raster Graphics). Rotate Raster This button moves the raster image in the window area in a counterclockwise direction. For more information, see the section Rotate Raster (Raster Graphics). Plot Window This button creates a file in Type 2 (straight byte) format of the specified display and plots it. For more information, see the section Plot Window (Raster Graphics). Fence Shape This button lets you select a portion of the raster image in the specified window. For more information, see the section Fence Shape (Raster Graphics). Quit This button dismisses the selected window. For more information, see the section Quit (Raster Graphics).
12 - 12
DB Access Graphics
DB Access Commands 13 - 1
DB Access Commands
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
13 - 2
DB Access Commands
DB Access Commands 13 - 3
13.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
DB Access Commands
This section contains alphabetized descriptions of the commands available in DB Access. In addition to general information about the command, a description may include any of the following, if appropriate. All command descriptions do not include all sections. Command Path This figure represents the selection path for the command. Select each palette command in the path (from left to right in the figure) to select the command. A command can have more than one command path.
Dialog Options If the command invokes a menu, this section describes the gadgets on the menu. Before Using This Command This section contains information you should know before selecting the command. Operating Sequence This section provides step-by-step instructions for using the command.
13 - 4
DB Access Commands
DB Access Commands A - 1
Add Query (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Add Query command lets you establish query criteria. You can use query criteria to limit the input universe processed by a report. If, for example, you want to search the parts table for tires, you can use the substring search (!!) relational operator to query the mfr_name field for the character string Tire. The resulting query criteria:
parts.mfr_name like %Tire%
would return rows for the two manufacturers in the database that produce tires (GoodTire and Armstrong Tires). Note that values for substring searches are enclosed in single tics () and percent signs (%). If you want to search for all parts except tires, you can do one of the following: Edit the previous query, adding the word not, to produce:
parts.mfr_name not like %Tire%
For information on editing queries, see the section Edit Query (Database Edit). In the relational operator field, key in not like when adding the query. In the mfr_name field, key in %Tire%. Again, the resulting query criteria would be:
parts.mfr_name not like %Tire%
Dialog Options
Add Query This button places the dialog in add query mode. Any value you key in for a column field is added as query criteria. The value in the database is not changed. The dialog remains in add query mode until you select Add Query again, or select another key-in mode.
A-2
DB Access Commands
AND/OR This toggle lets you establish a logical AND or OR operation. AND returns rows that contain the previous query criteria and the current column query criteria. OR returns rows that contain the previous query criteria or the current column query criteria. Multiple column searches process in order, with logical AND having precedence over logical OR. Relational Operator List This field lets you specify a relational operator for the query. You can key in a value or use the list indicator to select a relational operator. The following relational operators are available: = != < > <= >= !! equal to (default) not equal to less than greater than less than or equal to greater than or equal to substring search You can key in any relational operator supported by RIS.
Add Query (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
There are two places to select the same Add Query gadget in the Dialog Builder: Use the Override key-in mode:
OR Use the Query:
The Add Query command places an Add Query button, which lets you establish query criteria, column values used to search the database for rows with common information.
A-4
DB Access Commands
If you select an Add Query button, any value entered in a column field is added as query criteria, regardless of the default key-in mode for the field. For more information, see the section Add Query (Database Edit).
Dialog Options
When you select Add Query, the Add Query dialog appears.
The options on this dialog are standard Place Gadget options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) if you are not familiar with these options.
Operating Sequence
Place this gadget using the standard Place Gadget operating sequence. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of this sequence.
AND/OR Toggle (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The AND/OR Toggle command places an AND/OR toggle, which lets you select a logical AND or OR operation when establishing query criteria with Add Query. AND queries any rows that contain both the previous query criteria and any current column value that is specified. OR queries any row that contains either the previous query criteria or any current column value that is specified.
Dialog Options
When you select AND/OR Toggle, the AND/OR Toggle dialog appears.
A-6
DB Access Commands
The options on this dialog are standard Place Gadget options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options. Place Text/Place Symbol See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of this toggle. Initially On/Initially Off This toggle lets you control whether or not the AND/OR toggle is active the first time a dialog is accessed. Off Text This field lets you specify the text that appears when the toggle is set to the off position, which indicates an AND query. On Text This field lets you specify the text that appears when the toggle is set to the on position, which indicates an OR query.
Operating Sequence
Attach DAP Link (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This function is available in vector graphics only.
Displayable Attributes Processing (DAP) links the column values of the current row to a text node in a design file. The Attach DAP Link button lets you place a text node, create the linkage, and load the text node with the current row value. You can link the current row and one or more text nodes. You can place as many text nodes as needed. Once the linkage is established, a batch process can update the text nodes in a design file with the current values in the database. For example, if many elements in the design file have the same part number, you can place text nodes linked to the part number for those elements. If the part number changes, the design file can be updated by changing the part number column value in the database and running the Displayable Attributes Batch Process. See the section Displayable Attributes Batch Process.
Dialog Options
When you select Attach DAP Link, the Choose Report dialog appears.
Index Number This field specifies the index number of the current report. Key in a different number to make another report current. Reports in <filename> This text field specifies the name of the DAP control file. This is the value defined for DBA_DAP_FILE. Listing of reports This field lists the reports in the specified DAP control file. The current report is highlighted. Select another report to make it current.
A-8
DB Access Commands
Before Using this Command Administrator Requirements

1. 2. 3. Create the reports that contains the values you want on the text nodes. Place the report names, one report name per line, in a DAP control file. Set the DBA_DAP_FILE environment variable to the name of the DAP control file. For example:
set DBA_DAP_FILE=dap.ctl
The user variable can also be set through the Control Panel - System. 4. Set the following MicroStation environment variables: a. Set MS_FNTLB to the pathname of the default font library. For example:
MS_FNTLB=/usr#/ip32/mstation/font/libs/fontlib
b.
Set MS_RSRC to the pathname of the resource file. For example:

MS_RSRC=/usr#/ip32/mstation/ustation.rsc
5.
Build a dialog with the following gadgets: Attach DAP Link Multiple column field or Worksheet Process Query Current Row
Place other query gadgets on the dialog to specify a universe other than all rows in a table. If element linkages already exist in the design file, you can also include Review Element to establish the current row. All gadgets required to attach a DAP linkage are available on a default dialog.
Runtime User Requirements

1. Access the MicroStation design file. Establish a view that contains at least some of the elements for which you need to place text nodes. Access the DB Access dialog containing the required gadgets. Create a universe containing the rows you want to link to the text nodes in the design file.
2. 3.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Attach DAP Link. The Choose Report dialog appears on the screen with a list of available reports. The current report is highlighted. The prompt Place Text Node Origin appears. Select a report from the Choose Report dialog if the one you want is not highlighted. 2. Position the cursor where you want the text node and tap the middle mouse button. The text node and report values appear on the screen. 3. Continue to place text nodes for the current row and report. OR Change the current row or the current report and place new text nodes. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. You can move a text node after you place it with the MicroStation Move Element command.
Displayable Attributes Batch Process

Once the linkages are established on the text nodes (with Attach DAP Link), you can update the text nodes by running the DB Access Batch DAP processor. From the command line, key in:
dba -d <DAP_control_file> [other command-line options] <design_filename>
The process lists the reports that are loaded into the design file. It also lists the mslink of the reports row and the MicroStation text node of the old and new report. If you access the design file through MicroStation, you can see that the displayed values have been updated.
A - 10
DB Access Commands
Attach DAP Link (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Attach DAP Link command places an Attach DAP Link button, which attaches a linkage from the current row to a text node in a design file. Attach DAP Link is available in vector graphics only.
Dialog Options
When you select Attach DAP Link, the Attach DAP Link dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
A - 12
DB Access Commands
Attach DB Linkage (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Attach DB Linkage command creates a linkage between the current row on the Database Edit dialog and a graphic element in a design or raster file. A graphic element can be linked to several different database rows.
Before Using this Command

The database row you want to link to a graphic element must be the current row. You must select the appropriate linkage mode in the Linkage Mode field. See the section Linkage Mode Field. In raster graphics mode, set the Range/Multi field to the appropriate setting. For more information, see the section DB Access Raster Graphics.
Linkage Mode Field

The Linkage Mode field lets you select the type of linkage created with Attach Linkage. There are four linkage values: New This mode creates a Read/Write linkage and a new row in the database for the graphic element selected. The new row is based on the column values for the current row. Use Update Active if you want to change any column values before creating the new row. The next available mslink value is automatically assigned to the new row. Existing This mode creates a Read/Write linkage for the current row and the graphic element selected. Info This mode creates a read-only linkage for the current row and the graphic element selected. None This mode does not create a linkage. In vector graphics mode, this option lets the administrator prevent runtime users from attaching linkages to the design file.
Operating Sequence (MicroStation)

1. Select Attach DB Linkage from the Database Edit dialog. The prompt Identify element/reset to exit appears. 2. Position the cursor on the graphic element for which you want to create the database linkage. Click the left mouse button.
The element highlights, and the prompt Accept/reject element appears. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. 3. Click the left mouse button anywhere on the design file to accept the highlighted element. The message Processing, please wait... appears, followed by Linkage attached. If the Linkage Mode was set to New, the new row is displayed in the Database Edit dialog. The prompt Identify element/reset to exit appears. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the highlighted element. Return to Step 2. 4. Return to Step 2 to attach more database linkages to graphic elements. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the Attach DB Linkage command. After you attach linkages, you can use the MicroStation Place Fence command to generate input for a DB Access report. 1. Place a fence that contains the linked elements that you want to include in the report. Select Process Report from the Report Builder menu bar. OR Select Process from the Reports area of the DB Access main dialog. Select Query to specify that query criteria is used to generate the input universe. 3. At the prompt, Accept/reject fence contents, click the left mouse button to accept the fence contents. Any rows that are linked to elements within the fence (and meet any additional query criteria you have set) are included in the report.
2.
A - 14
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence (Raster Graphics)

1. 2. Select Attach DB Linkage from the Database Edit dialog. At the prompt, Enter point 1, identify the area (range or multi-sided) where the linkage is established. The element highlights and the prompt Accept/reject linkage appears. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. 3. Click the left mouse button to confirm the linkage. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the linkage.
Attach DB Linkage (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Attach DB Linkage command places an Attach DB Linkage button, which creates a linkage between the current row on a DB Access dialog and a graphic element in a design or raster file.
Dialog Options
When you select Attach DB Linkage, the Attach DB Linkage dialog appears.
A - 16
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Attach File Link (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Attach File Link command places an Attach File Link button, which links raster elements in the same file or different files.
Dialog Options
When you select Attach File Link, the Attach File Link menu appears.
A - 18
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Attach Note Link (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Attach Note Link command places an Attach Note Link button, which attaches a linkage from a raster element to a text file.
Dialog Options
When you select Attach Note Link, the Attach Note Link dialog appears.
A - 20
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Auto Sequence (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Auto Sequence button automatically creates a sequence for non-coded, single column fields and user fields on a dialog. The fields are sequenced in order of their placement on the dialog.
Before Using This Command

Place the fields on the dialog before selecting Auto Sequence.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Auto Sequence from the Dialog Builder menu bar. Any non-coded, single column fields and user fields are sequenced in order of their placement on the dialog. The sequence appears as yellow dotted arrows between the fields.
A - 22
DB Access Commands
DB Access Commands B - 1
Build Schema List (Schema Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Build Schema List command lets you build a schema list. Each schema in the list is assigned an integer value that is stored with any dialog or report that references the schema. When schemas are added to the schema list, the list of schemas appears when a Schema Select is selected. Use the Build Schema List command before creating multiple-schema dialog or report templates for users to access with a DB Access Runtime product. Multiple-schema templates retrieve data from tables in more than one schema. A schema list is necessary only for multi-schema joins. If no schema list is specified (using DBA_SCHEMA_LIST or the -S command-line option), any available RIS schema can be attached. The order of the schema list determines the integer value associated with each schema. For example, you build a schema list with three schemas: schema value assigned 1 2 3
schema1 schema2 schema3
You design a multiple-schema dialog while schema3 is the current schema. The dialog joins tables in schema3 and schema1. The integer values 3 and 1 are stored with the dialog template. For a runtime user to access the dialog, the users current schema (set with DBA_SCHEMA or the -s command-line option) must have the same data structure as schema3. The first schema in the users schema list (set with DBA_SCHEMA_LIST or the -S command-line option) must have the same structure as schema1.
B-2
DB Access Commands
In general, the order of the schema list at build time should be the same as the users schema list at runtime. The runtime users current schema should be the same as the current schema at build time. The schemas must have the same data structure; they do not have to be the same schemas. You can design reports and dialogs for multiple schemas of the same structure.
Dialog Options
When you select Build Schema List, the Build Schema List dialog appears.
Current Schemas This field displays the current schema list. By default, the list contains the schemas specified by DBA_SCHEMA_LIST or the -S command-line option. If no schema list has been defined, only the current schema appears. Delete This button lets you delete a schema from the schema list. Select Delete and then the schema to delete. Select Delete again to exit delete mode. Available Schemas This field lists schemas that can be added to the schema list. These are the available schemas in the current dictionary database.
DB Access Commands B - 3
Select a schema from the Schema Name column to add it to the schema list. The schema is inserted above the marker (highlighted) line in the Current Schemas field. If no marker line exists, the schema is inserted at the bottom of the schema list. Select a line in the schema list to make it a marker line.
B-4
DB Access Commands
Button (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Button command places a text, bitmap or symbol button.
Dialog Options
When you select Button, the Button dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
DB Access Commands C - 1
Cancel (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Cancel command places a Cancel button, which exits you from the current dialog or cancels a process. If the dialog is called from another dialog, the previous dialog appears.
Dialog Options
When you select Cancel, the Cancel dialog appears.
C-2
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Cancel (Raster Graphics)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Cancel command dismisses the selected operation. To use this command, select Cancel and a window.
C-4
DB Access Commands
Change All (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Change All command lets you change the value of one or more columns for all rows in the current universe. You cannot use Change All to edit a serial column (INFORMIX). You cannot enter duplicate values in a column used for unique row identification (mslink, mscatalog.key column, or unique index). For more information, see sections Editing Database Values and DB Access Reserved Tables.
Operating Sequence
1. 2. Use the query functions to generate the universe of rows you want to change. Select Change All. The Change All button appears to be depressed. The screen dialog is in change all mode; any edits you make are added as change criteria. 3. Select a column field. Key in the value you want to establish for all rows in the current universe. The message Change criteria added appears. 4. Continue to select column fields and key in new values until all change criteria have been added. Select Change All again. The SQL Statements dialog appears, displaying the SQL update statement that changes the column values.
5.
You can save the update statement as an SQL template with the Save SQL command. 6. Select Process from the SQL Statements dialog to update the values in the universe. OR Select Cancel to cancel the change. You can bypass steps 5 and 6 setting the global variable DBA_NO_CHANGE_ALL_VERIFY. For more information, see the c:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc\globals.txt file.
C-6
DB Access Commands
Change All (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Change All command places a Change All button, which lets you change the value of one or more columns for all rows in the current universe.
Dialog Options
When you select Change All, the Change All dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
C-8
DB Access Commands
Change Row (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Change Row command puts the dialog in change row mode, which overrides the key-in mode for key column, add query, and update active fields. Key column, add query, and update active fields can be placed on custom dialogs created with DB Access. By default, the multiple column field on the Database Edit dialog is in change row mode. To update a value in the current row, select the appropriate column field and key in a new value. The row is automatically updated in the database. You cannot use Change Row to edit a serial column (INFORMIX). You cannot enter duplicate values in a column used for unique row identification (mslink, mscatalog.key column, or unique index). For more information, see sections Editing Database Values and DB Access Reserved Tables.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Change Row. The Change Row button appears to be depressed. The screen dialog is in change row mode; any column values you edit are updated in the database. 2. Select a key column, add query, or update active field. Key in a new value. The message Row changed appears. 3. Continue to select column fields and key in new values until all changes have been made. Select Change Row again to exit change row mode.
4.
Change Row (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Change Row command places a Change Row button, which lets you edit column values for a displayed row. The Change Row function lets you edit key columns, add query columns, and update active columns.
Dialog Options
When you select Change Row, the Change Row dialog appears.
C - 10
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Check Box (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Check Box command places a checklist box. You can use scripts to define the function or read the value of the checklist box.
Dialog Options
When you select Check Box, the Check Box/Radio Button dialog appears.
Unselected/Selected This toggle specifies the default value for the checklist box. Unselected means the box does not have a check mark (that is, it is not selected). Selected means the box will be checked. Radio Group This field specifies a label number for a group of checklist boxes that you place. Assigning a group label number lets you treat the checklist as a single gadget, with only one box selectable at a time. Each box also has an individual label number. If Group Label is non-zero, Radio buttons are placed instead of checklists.
Operating Sequence
C - 12
DB Access Commands
Clear All Dialogs (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Clear All Dialogs command clears all dialogs from the dialog builder.
Operating Sequence
When you select the Clear All Dialogs command, all the dialogs currently loaded in the Dialog Builder disappear.
Column (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Single Column This button lets you place a single column field, which displays a column value from the current row. See the section Single Column (Dialog Builder). Multiple Column This button lets you place a multiple column field, which displays one or more column values from the current row. See the section Multiple Column (Dialog Builder). Worksheet This button lets you place multiple column fields, which display column values from the current universe of rows. Worksheet columns show more than one row at a time. See the section Worksheet (Dialog Builder).
C - 14
DB Access Commands
Column (Report Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Column (Report Builder) command places a field that retrieves and prints column values from the current universe of rows. Column fields are the most important on the report template, because they retrieve information fields from the database, user data file, or ASCII file. Column fields are usually placed on body lines. Join columns let you use a single table report to report on more than one table. Any two database tables that have columns with common values can be joined. See the section Join Columns. There is no need to use the more complex unrelated table report unless the tables are not related. For example, to report on the manufacturer and sale tables, which do not share a join column, you need an unrelated tables report template. You must place separate body lines for each table in the report.
Dialog Options
When you select Column, the DBA Column Field dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the menu except for the Print Condition field, which is described in the section Place Field. Schema This field specifies the schema containing the table for which you want to place a column field. You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator to select a new schema. Table This field specifies the table for which you want to place a column field. You can key in a new table name or use the list indicator to select a new table. Column This field specifies the column from the current table for which you want to place a column field. You can key in a new column name or use the list indicator to select a new column. Join Columns This button lets you review and edit the join column relationship. The button is inactive until join columns are specified. If you place a column field from a table other than the current table on a single table report, you must specify a join column between the primary (that is, the current) table and the secondary table. See the section Join Columns. Code Text/Number These radio buttons lets you specify whether the column field displays the code number or code text for a coded column. These radio buttons are inactive until a coded column is specified in the Column field. Length This field specifies the character length of the column field. Decimal Places This field specifies the number of decimal places for numeric data.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Column from the Report Builder menu bar. The DBA Column Field dialog appears. 2. At the Column field, enter the name of a column from the current table using key-in or the list indicator. Go to Step 5. OR At the Schema and/or Table field, enter a new schema and/or table using key-in or the list indicator.
C - 16
DB Access Commands
The DBA Join Columns dialog appears.
3.
At the Column field for the primary table, enter the name of the join column using key-in or the list indicator. Repeat for the secondary table. Then Specify whether the join is an outer join. Select OK to return to the DBA Column Field dialog. The DBA Join Columns dialog disappears. The Join Columns button on the DBA Column Field dialog is active. You can optionally specify all table relations in your database through Edit Relations (Utilities - Schema Edit.)
4.
At the Column field on the DBA Column Field dialog, use key-in or the list indicator to enter the name of the column from the secondary table for which you want to place a field. Set any other parameters as needed. Select OK. The field is dynamically attached to the cursor. The values in the message area can help you position the field on the dialog. DB Access uses F-1, F-2, and so on to represent the first, second, and any subsequent fields on a line.
5.
6.
Click the left mouse button to place the field. The field is inserted before the current field (if any), with one space separating the two fields. Any fields to the right of the new field will shift to the right. You can realign the fields using the following commands: Move Field Delete Field Undelete Field (Report Builder) Insert Space (Report Builder) Delete Space
OR Select Cancel to end the placement.
Once you establish a join column between two tables, you can place additional column fields from the secondary table. The DBA Join Columns dialog does not reappear.
C - 18
DB Access Commands
Combo Box (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Combo Box command places a combo box on the current dialog.
Dialog Options
When you select Combo Box, the Combo Box dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
Copy Field
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Copy Field command copies a field on a report template one or more times.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu, then select Field and Copy from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select field appears. 2. Select a field on the current report template. The field is dynamically attached to the cursor. As you move the cursor over the report template, information in the message area changes to reflect the current line, column, line type, table, and field. DB Access uses F-1, F-2, and so on to represent the first, second, and any subsequent fields on a line. 3. Click the left mouse button to place the field. DB Access copies the field to the new position.
OR Click the right mouse button to select a different field. Return to Step 2.
C - 20
DB Access Commands
4.
Continue to copy the field to new positions. OR Click the right mouse button to select a different field. Return to Step 2. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command.
Copy Gadget (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Copy Gadget (Dialog Builder) command copies a gadget on the displayed dialog one or more times.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Gadget and Copy from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select gadget or key in label appears. 2. Select a gadget (field, function button, line, rectangle, bezel, or text) on the current dialog or key in the numeric label for the gadget (obtained by selecting the Display Labels command from the Dialog Builder menu bar). The gadget highlights, and the prompt Accept/reject gadget appears. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. 3. To accept the gadget, click the left mouse button or press Return. The gadget attaches to the cursor in drag mode. The prompt Select placement point appears. OR Double Click the right mouse button to reject the gadget. Return to Step 2. 4. Move the cursor to a new location on the dialog.
C - 22
DB Access Commands
The x,y coordinates display in the message area so you can position the gadget on the dialog. 5. Click the left mouse button. A copy of the gadget is placed at the new location. 6. Return to Step 4 to place another copy of the gadget in a new location. OR Click the right mouse button to select a new gadget to copy. Return to Step 2. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command.
Copy Line
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Copy Line command copies a line on a report template one or more times.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Line and Copy from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select line appears. 2. Select a line on the current report template. The line is dynamically attached to the cursor. As you move the cursor over the report template, information in the message area changes to reflect the current line, column, table, and field. 3. Click the left mouse button to place the line. DB Access copies the line to the new position.
OR Click the right mouse button to select a different line. Return to Step 2. 4. Continue to copy the line to new positions. OR Click the right mouse button to select a different line. Return to Step 2.
C - 24
DB Access Commands
OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command.
Copy Redlines (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Copy Redlines command places a Copy Redlines button, which lets you copy the redlines on the drawing.
Dialog Options
When you select Copy Redlines, the Copy Redlines dialog appears.
C - 26
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Counter (Report Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Counter (Report Builder) command lets you place a field that prints the number of rows that have processed. The fields in any default report under the text field Quantity are counter fields. You can set up counters to count certain types of rows or to give subtotals of the number of rows processed. A counter field on an All Tables line counts the rows for all tables; a counter field on a line for a particular table counts rows for that table only. Counter fields used for subtotals and totals are usually placed on body lines and final lines respectively.
Dialog Options
When you select Counter, the DBA Counter Field dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the menu except for the Print Condition field, which is described in the section Place Field. Length This field lets you specify the length of the counter field.
C - 28
DB Access Commands
Update Condition This field lets you specify a condition which must exist for the field to be incremented. If the Update Condition field is blank, the counter field is incremented for every row. Reset Condition This field lets you specify a condition which must exist for the field to be reset to zero. If the Reset Condition field is blank, the counter field is not reset.
Operating Sequence
Place this field using the standard Place Field operating sequence. See the section Place Field for a description of this sequence.
Create/Alter Table (Schema Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Create/Alter Table command lets you create a new table or alter an existing one. Use this command to: Define columns for a new table. Copy the column definition of an existing table to a new table. Add columns to existing tables. Create DB Access reserved tables. Define coded columns and create the join tables to contain the code list values.
C - 30
DB Access Commands
Dialog Options
When you select Create/Alter Table, the Create/Alter Table dialog appears.
Schema This field specifies the schema for which you want to create or alter a table. You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator to select a new schema. Table This field specifies the name of the table to create or alter. You can key in a table name or use the list indicator to select a table. If you specify an existing table, the dialog is in alter table mode; if you specify a new table, the dialog is in create table mode. If you key in the name of a DB Access reserved table that does not already exist, DB Access automatically adds the appropriate columns. For more information, see the section DB Access Reserved Tables. Apply This button creates a new table or alters an existing one. Select this button after specifying the columns to be added. If you dismiss the dialog without selecting Process, the new table is not created or the existing table is not altered. Column Name This field specifies the name of a column to add to the specified table. Type This checklist lets you select the data type for the column. If you select Character, a Length field appears. Key in a size for the character data.
If you select Coded, the Coded Column Options dialog appears. This dialog is described in the section Adding Coded Columns. Nulls Allowed This toggle specifies whether the column accepts null values. INFORMIX does not support adding not null columns to existing tables.
Column Name, Type, Size, Nulls This field lists information about the columns for the specified table. If you are creating a table, this field displays the columns you add. If you are altering a table, this field displays the existing columns plus any columns you add. Create Table Mode/Alter Table Mode This text string indicates whether the table is in create table or alter table mode. This mode is set when you enter a table name in the Table field. Add Column This button lets you build an add-column list, which appears in the column list field. Columns in the add-column list do not exist until you select Process. Select Add Column after specifying the parameters for the column. The column is inserted above the marker (highlighted) line in the column list field. If no marker line exists, the column is inserted at the bottom of the column list. Select a line in the addcolumn list to make it a marker line. You cannot select an existing column. Modify Column This button lets you modify columns in the add-column list. You cannot modify an existing column. Select Modify Column and then the column to modify. Information for the column is reflected in the Column Name, Type, and Nulls Allowed gadgets. You can edit this information. You can edit multiple columns or select Modify Column again to exit modify column mode. Delete Column This button lets you delete any columns in the add-column list. You cannot delete an existing column. Select Delete Column and then a column to delete. You can delete multiple columns or select Delete Column again to exit the delete column mode. Clear List This button clears all columns from the add-column list. You cannot clear existing columns. Add mslink This button adds the mslink column to the add-column list. The mslink column is one method DB Access uses for unique row identification. MicroStation uses mslink to specify a row that a graphics element is linked to. Thus, you must add mslink to a table before linking rows from the table to graphic elements in a design file.
C - 32
DB Access Commands
When you select Apply after adding an mslink column to an existing table, the Define Key Columns dialog appears. This dialog is described in the section Define Key Columns Dialog. You can use the Create/Alter Table dialog to copy an existing tables column definition to a new table. 1. Specify an existing schema and table in the Schema and Table fields. The existing columns appear in the column list. 2. 3. Specify a new schema and/or table to copy the columns to. Select Process. A new table with the same column definition is created. If one of the columns is coded, the appropriate join table is created, if it does not exist.
Define Key Columns Dialog

When you add the mslink column to an existing table and select Process, the Define Key Columns dialog appears.
Column Name, Type, Size, Nulls This field lists information about the columns for the specified table. Select a column containing unique values (one with a unique index) or a combination of columns that together uniquely identify a row. This ensures that the added mslink values are unique for each row in the table. Process This button adds the mslink column to the specified table. DB Access generates unique mslink values for each row based on the columns you selected.
All Columns This button selects all columns in the column list field. You can use all columns to identify rows uniquely or you can select a column a second time to deselect it.
Adding Coded Columns

When you create a table with a coded column or add a coded column to an existing table, DB Access also creates a join table to contain the code list values. You can specify names for the join table and the columns in the table. You can include an index column if the join table will contain more than one code list. For more information, see these sections Edit Code (Database Edit) DB Access Reserved Tables Before adding a coded column to a table, you must create the mscodelist table for the schema. If you key in mscodelist in the Table field on the Create/Alter Table dialog, DB Access automatically adds the appropriate columns. Select Process to create the table. The table to which you add a coded column should have a means of unique row identification (mslink, mscatalog.key_columns, or unique index) so you can use Edit Code to add code list values to rows in the table.
Dialog Options
When you select the Coded checklist box on the Create/Alter Table dialog, the Code Column Options dialog appears.
Join Table This field specifies the name of the join table that contains the code list values for the coded column. By default, Join Table has the same name as the coded column. You can key in a different name or use the list indicator to select an existing join table.
C - 34
DB Access Commands
Code Column This field specifies the name of the column that contains code number values. By default the column is named code_number. You can key in a different name or use the list indicator to select an existing column. Text Column This field specifies the name of the column that contains code text values. By default the column is named code_text. You can key in a different name or use the list indicator to select an existing column. Index This checklist box lets you add an index column to the join table. If you select Index, the following fields appear: Index Column. This field specifies the name of the column that contains index values. You can key in a name or use the list indicator to select an existing column. Index Value. This field specifies the index value for the coded column being added. You can store multiple code lists in a join table by: Specifying the same join table name, but different code column and text column names for each code list. Selecting the Index checklist. Specify the same join table, code column, text column, and index column names, but different index value for each code list. When you select Edit Code in Database Edit, only the appropriate code list values appear.
Create/Edit Group (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Create/Edit Group command lets you create and edit gadget groups. Creating groups lets you associate gadgets with similar functions.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit Group from the pulldown menu. The prompt Select gadget or key in label appears. 2. Select a gadget on the current dialog or key in the numeric label field for the gadget (obtained by selecting the Display Labels command from the pulldown menu). The gadget highlights, and the prompt Accept/reject gadget appears. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. 3. To accept the gadget, click the right mouse button or press Enter.
C - 36
DB Access Commands
Create Sequence (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Create Sequence command creates linkages between dialog gadgets to define a sequence for users to follow. At runtime, when the user completes an operation with a sequenced gadget, the next gadget in the sequence highlights.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Create Sequence from the Dialog Builder menu bar. The prompt Select gadget or key in label appears. 2. Select a gadget on the current dialog or key in the numeric label for the gadget (obtained by selecting the Display Labels command from the Dialog Builder menu bar). The gadget highlights, and the prompt Accept/reject gadget appears. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. 3. To accept the gadget, click the right mouse button or press Return. An arrow is dynamically attached to the cursor and the prompt Poke next gadget in sequence appears. 4. Select the next gadget in the sequence.
The gadget highlights, and the prompt Accept/reject gadget appears. 5. To accept the gadget, click the right mouse button or press Return. The established linkage is displayed as a dotted yellow arrow between the two gadgets. The prompt Poke next gadget in sequence appears. OR If the new linkage is the second linkage from or to one of the gadgets, the existing linkage appears in red and the new linkage appears in green. The prompt Accept = Green Link; Reject = Red Link appears. Click the right mouse button to replace the existing linkage with the new linkage, or click the right mouse button to keep the existing linkage and reject the new linkage. 6. Return to Step 4 to continue linking gadgets. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command.
C - 38
DB Access Commands
Current Row (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The gadgets in the Current Row area let you determine which row in the universe is current. Column values for the current row appear in the multiple column field on the Database Edit dialog.
Current Row Slider Move the slider to scroll through the universe of rows. Previous Row This (left-facing) arrow makes the previous row current. Select the arrow repeatedly to move backward through the universe a row at a time. Next Row This (right-facing) arrow makes the next row current. Select the arrow repeatedly to move forward through the universe a row at a time. Pick Row This field lets you key in the number of a row to make it current.
Current Row (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Current Row command calls a palette containing commands that let you place buttons for manipulating a universe of rows. Row Text This button places a text field that displays the number for the current row. The number is the current rows position in the current universe (for example, Row 2 of 49). See the section Current Row Text (Dialog Builder). Next Row This button places a Next Row button, which makes the next row in the universe the current row. Column values for the current row appear in their corresponding column fields on the dialog. See the section Next Row (Dialog Builder). Pick Row This button places a Pick Row field, which displays the current row number. A user can edit the value in a Pick Row field to change the current row. See the section Pick Row (Dialog Builder). Previous Row This button places a Previous Row button, which makes the previous row in the universe the current row. Column values for the current row appear in their corresponding column fields on the dialog. See the section Previous Row (Dialog Builder). Row Slider This button places a row slider, which determines which row in the universe is current. Column values for the current row appear in their corresponding column fields on the dialog. See the section Current Row Slider (Dialog Builder).
C - 40
DB Access Commands
Current Row Slider (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Current Row Slider command places a row slider, which determines which row in the universe is current. Column values for the current row appear in their corresponding column fields on the dialog.
Dialog Options
When you select Current Row Slider, the Current Row Slider dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
C - 42
DB Access Commands
Current Row Text (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Current Row Text command places a text field that displays the number for the current row. When you place the field, it reads Row n of n. At runtime, the field displays the current row number and current universe size (for example, Row 2 of 49 for the second row in a universe of 49 rows).
Dialog Options
When you select Current Row Text, the Current Row Text dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
C - 44
DB Access Commands
Current Table Text (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Current Table Text command lets you place a field that displays the table name for the table associated with the current dialog. For example, if the dialog is associated with a table named parts, at runtime the user would see parts table displayed in the Current Table text field.
Dialog Options
When you select Current Table Text, the Current Table Text dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
C - 46
DB Access Commands
DB Access Commands D - 1
Database Utilities (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Database Utilities command calls a panel menu that contains commands for interactively placing gadgets on the current dialog. Column This button calls a palette of commands that let you place column fields on the current dialog. See the section Column (Dialog Builder). Current Row This button calls a palette of commands that let you place gadgets for manipulating a universe of rows. The gadgets include the same functions found in the Current Row box in Database Edit. See the section Current Row (Dialog Builder). Delete This button calls a palette of commands that let you place function buttons that let you delete rows from the current universe. See the section Delete (Dialog Builder). Edit Code This button lets you place an Edit Code button, which lets you display, edit, and insert new code list values in a code list. See the section Edit Code (Dialog Builder). Fields On/Off This button lets you place a Fields On/Off button, which toggles all column fields on or off. Off fields are excluded from universe reviews and are skipped over when a user enters data. See the section Fields On/Off (Dialog Builder). Insert Row This button lets you place an Insert Row button, which inserts a new row based on the column values for the displayed row. See the section Insert Row (Dialog Builder). Override Key-in Mode This button calls a palette of commands that let you place function buttons to let the user override key-in modes for column fields. See the section Override Key-in (Dialog Builder).
D-2
DB Access Commands
Query This button calls a palette of commands that let you place various query function buttons on the current dialog. See the section Query (Dialog Builder). Report This button calls a palette of commands that let you generate report output or review the current universe of rows. See the section Report (Dialog Builder). Restore Defaults This button places a Restore Defaults button, which restores the default values of the displayed columns. In effect, it erases the display of the current row. See the section Restore Defaults (Dialog Builder). SQL Statement This button lets you place an SQL Statement button, which processes any SQL statements associated with the button. See the section SQL Statement (Dialog Builder). Schema Select This button lets you place a field with a list indicator that displays all current schemas in a users schema list. See the section Schema Select (Dialog Builder). Table Select This button lets you place a field with a list indicator that displays all tables in the current schema. See the section Table Select (Dialog Builder). Current Table Text This button lets you place a field that displays the table name for the table associated with the current dialog. This field operates identically to the field on the Database Edit screen that displays the current table name. See the section Current Table Text (Dialog Builder). Update Row This button places an Update Row button, which updates the current row based on the currently displayed column values. See the section Update Row (Dialog Builder).
Date
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Date command places a field that prints the system date (month, date, and year) in a format that you choose. You usually place date fields on a top or preface line.
Dialog Options
When you select Date, the DBA Date Field dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the menu except for the Print Condition field, which is described in the section Place Field. Date Formats This checklist lets you select the print format for the date field.
D-4
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Define Structure
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Define Structure command calls the DBA Structure Definition dialog containing commands for defining data structure templates. Several Intergraph applications and some customers use user data on MicroStation elements and ASCII or binary files to store data. DB Access requires data structure templates so that reports can be written on this data. Once these templates are defined, reports can be created in the same way that they are for databases. The DBA Structure Definition dialog changes slightly as you choose to define an ASCII, Binary, or user data template. For more information, see sections ASCII Structure, Userdata Structure.

You must know the structure of the file on which you want to report.
ASCII Structure
Selecting a structure type of ASCII from the Structure Definition dialog lets you define a structure template so that DB Access can report on data in an ASCII file. DB Access uses the structure template to interpret the ASCII file and format the specified data into a report. The template you create describes a row structure, or table, for the ASCII file and the columns (type, length, and offset) for that table.
D-6
DB Access Commands
Dialog Options
When you select a structure type of ASCII from the DBA Structure Definition dialog, the dialog appears as follows:
Table Number This field specifies the table number. Table Name This field specifies the table name. Table Condition This field specifies a condition that must exist for a row in the ASCII input file to qualify as this table type. This is only necessary if multiple row types exist in the input file. If the field is blank, all rows qualify. The table condition normally compares column values to a constant, for example:
c_type == 1
If the type column equals 1, this row qualifies for this table. Tables This select-only field lists the specified tables. Select a line to make it a marker (highlighted) line. The dialog cannot be in delete or edit mode. (That is, the Delete and Edit buttons are not depressed). New tables can be added and the delete buffer inserted before a marker line.
Columns This select-only field lists the columns in the specified tables. Select a line to make it a marker (highlighted) line. The dialog cannot be in delete or edit mode. (That is, the Delete and Edit buttons are not depressed.) New columns can be added and the delete buffer inserted before a marker line. Column Number This field specifies the column number. Column Name This field specifies the column name. Column Type This checklist lets you select the column data type (Floating Point, Integer, or Character). Length This field specifies the number of characters in the field. Byte Offset This field specifies where the valid data begins relative to zero. Load This button loads an ASCII structure from a template library. Save This button saves an ASCII structure to a template library. Edit This button places the dialog in edit mode. Select Edit and then select a column from the column list. The attributes for the column appear in the area at the bottom of the dialog. You can edit these attributes. Delete This button puts the dialog in delete mode; any line, either table or column, you select is deleted and stored in a delete buffer. The delete buffer stores deleted lines until you exit delete mode. Select Delete again to exit delete mode. The delete buffer is cleared whenever you enter delete mode. Add Table This button adds the table to the table list. Add Column This button adds a column to the column list. Select Add after you enter information at the bottom of the dialog. The new column is inserted before the marker line in the column list. If no marker line exists, the new column is inserted at the bottom of the list.
Binary Structure
Selecting a structure type of Binary from the DBA Structure Definition dialog lets you define a structure template so that DB Access can report on data in a binary file. DB Access uses the structure template to interpret the binary file and format the specified data into a report. The template you create describes a row structure, or table, for the binary file and the columns (type, length, and offset) for that table.
D-8
DB Access Commands
Dialog Options
The dialog for binary structure definition contains many of the same features as the ASCII structure definition dialog. See ASCII Structure for information on these features. When you select a structure type of binary from the DBA Structure Definition dialog, the dialog appears as follows:
Table Length This field lets you manually restrict the columns in the specified table. This number is adjusted as you add and delete columns. Column Type This checklist lets you select the column data type. The following types are available: Bit Field Character 4-byte Float 8-byte Float 1-byte Integer 2-byte Integer 3-byte Integer 4-byte Integer
Bit Offset This field specifies where the relevant data begins in bits (for bit fields only). DB Access supports variable length records in Unrelated Tables reports.
Userdata Structure
Selecting a structure type of Userdata from the DBA Structure Definition dialog lets you define a structure template so that DB Access can report on user data in a design file. DB Access uses the structure template to interpret the user data and format it into a report. The template you create describes a user data structure, or table, for the user data design file and the columns (type, length, and offset) for that table. These columns identify the fields carried in the design file. Userdata structures can be delivered with an application product. If not, you can define the structure of the nongraphic data attached to graphic elements using the Define Structure command.
Dialog Options
The dialog for binary structure definition contains many of the same features as the ASCII structure definition dialog. See the section ASCII Structure for information on these features. When you select a structure type of Userdata from the DBA Structure Definition dialog, the dialog appears as follows:
D - 10
DB Access Commands
Column Type This checklist lets you select the column data type. The following types are available: Bit Field Character 4-byte Float 8-byte Float 1-byte Integer 2-byte Integer 3-byte Integer 4-byte Integer
Bit Offset This field specifies where the relevant data begins in bits (for bit fields only).
Delete (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Delete command calls a menu panel containing commands that let you place buttons for deleting rows in the current universe. Delete All This button places a Delete All button, which deletes all rows in the current universe from the database. See the section Delete All (Dialog Builder). Delete Row This button places a Delete Row button, which deletes the displayed row from the database. See the section Delete Row (Dialog Builder).
D - 12
DB Access Commands
Delete All (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Delete All command deletes all rows in the current universe from the database upon verification.
Operating Sequence
1. 2. Use the query functions to generate the universe of rows you want to delete. Select Delete All. The SQL Statements dialog appears, displaying an SQL delete statement that deletes the current universe of rows.
You can save the delete statement as an SQL template with the Save SQL command. 3. Select Process from the SQL Statements dialog to delete the rows. OR Select Cancel to cancel the deletion.
Delete All (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Delete All command places a Delete All button, which deletes all rows in the current universe from the database.
Dialog Options
When you select Delete All, the Delete All dialog appears.
D - 14
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Operating Sequence
1. Select Placement from the Toolbar menu. Select Delete and Delete All from the pulldown menus. The Delete All dialog appears. 2. Edit the available parameters or accept the default parameters. Select Exit and Save to place the button. If you selected Keyin and specified coordinates, the Delete All button is automatically placed on the dialog. OR If you selected Data Point, the button is dynamically attached to the screen cursor. The x,y coordinates appear in the message area so you can position the button. Click the middle mouse button to specify the upper left corner for the Delete All button. Click the middle mouse button a second time to specify the lower right corner. OR Select Cancel to end the placement.
Delete Field
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Delete Field command deletes a field from a report template. You can also use Delete Field to delete a field of spaces, any number of spaces between two fields. Fields to the right of the cursor position are shifted over to the current cursor position. Use Delete Field with Undelete Field, to align or reposition fields on different lines.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Field and Delete from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select Field appears. As you move the cursor over the report template, information in the message area changes to reflect the current line, column, table, and field. DB Access uses F-1, F-2, and so on to represent the first, second, and any subsequent fields on a line. 2. Select a field on the current report template. The prompt Accept/Reject field appears. 3. Click the left mouse button to delete the field. DB Access deletes the field. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the deletion.
D - 16
DB Access Commands
When you delete a field in the report template, fields to the right of the deleted field stay in the same position. Click the left mouse button again to delete the field of spaces between the cursor and the next field.
Delete Gadget (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Delete Gadget (Dialog Builder) command deletes a gadget on the current dialog.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Gadget and Delete from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select gadget or key in label appears. 2. Select a gadget (field, function button, line, rectangle, bezel, or text) on the current dialog or key in the numeric label for the gadget (obtained by selecting the Display Labels command from the Dialog Builder menu panel). The gadget highlights, and the prompt Accept/reject gadget appears. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. 3. To accept the gadget, click the left mouse button or press Return. The gadget is deleted. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the gadget. The gadget is not deleted.
D - 18
DB Access Commands
4.
Return to Step 2 to select another gadget. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command.
Delete Group (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Delete Group command lets you delete the group status of an existing gadget group.
D - 20
DB Access Commands
Delete Line
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Delete Line command deletes a line from a report template.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit on the Toolbar menu. Select Line and Delete from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select Line appears. As you move the cursor over the report template, information in the message area changes to reflect the current line, column, table, and field. 2. Select a line on the current report template. The prompt Accept/Reject line appears. 3. Click the left mouse button to delete the line. DB Access deletes the line. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the deletion.
Delete Redlines (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Delete Redlines command places a Delete Redlines button, which deletes the redlines on the drawing by the user.
Dialog Options
When you select Delete Redlines, the Delete Redlines dialog appears.
D - 22
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Delete Row (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Delete Row command deletes the current row from the database. When you select Delete Row, a dialog appears asking you to verify the deletion. Select Yes to delete the current row. Select No to cancel the deletion.
D - 24
DB Access Commands
Delete Row (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Delete Row command places a Delete Row button, which deletes the current row from the database.
Dialog Options
When you select Delete Row, the Delete Row dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
D - 26
DB Access Commands
Delete Sequence (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Delete Sequence button lets you delete linkages in an existing sequence.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Options from the Toolbar menu. Select Sequencing and Delete from the pulldown menus. Any existing linkages appear as dotted yellow arrows between gadgets. The prompt Select gadget or key in label appears. 2. Select the gadget that initiates a linkage, or key in the numeric label for that gadget (obtained by selecting the Display Labels command from the Dialog Builder menu panel). The gadget highlights, and the prompt Accept/reject gadget appears. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. 3. To accept the gadget, tap the middle mouse button or press <Return>. The linkage appears in red and the prompt Accept/reject deletion of this linkage appears. Click the left mouse button to delete the linkage. OR If no linkage exists, the message Gadget is not linked to anything appears.
Delete Space
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Delete Space command lets you delete spaces between fields in a report template. You can use the Delete Field command to delete several spaces at once. For more information, see the section Delete Field.
Operating Sequence
1. 2. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Delete space from the pulldown menu. Place the cursor where you want to delete spaces. Click the left mouse button once for each space. Fields to the right of the cursor are moved left. 3. Delete spaces from a new location. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command.
D - 28
DB Access Commands
Derived
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Derived command lets you place a field that prints the results of a formula. This formula can be a user variable or an equation using specified fields, columns, constants, or variables. Derived fields are usually placed on body lines and display in the report template as a string of Ds.
Dialog Options
When you select Derived, the DBA Derived Field dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the menu except for the Print Condition field, which is described in the section Place Field. Length This field lets you specify the length of the derived field. Decimal Places This field specifies the number of decimal places. Formula This field lets you specify a formula, the result of which prints in the derived field.
Operating Sequence
D - 30
DB Access Commands
Design Options
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Design Options command calls a dialog that lets you save and load parameters commonly used in dialog or report design. When you select Design Options, the Design Options dialog appears:
Template Specifies the template library. Description Specifies a description of the template. Load Options This button lets you load an existing options template from a specified template library. Save Options This button lets you save common parameters to an options template. See the section Save Options. Dialog Location These fields let you specify the x and y origin and height and width of a new blank dialog in pixels. Typeface & Size Sample Displays an example of the typeface with the current display settings. Typeface Specifies the default typeface for new gadgets. Size Specifies the text size in points for new gadgets. Bold Specifies the display text is boldface. Italic Specifies the display text is italicized. Load Dialog Cell This parameter specifies the active dialog cell for the Place Cell command. Either key in a dialog template name or select the Load Dialog Cell button and select one from a template library. Verbose Mode Controls verbose notification of script errors. Edit Settings This button calls the Verbose Error Settings dialog, which lets you select which function types undergo verbose error checking (standard C, DB Access, I/Forms, I/NFM, RIS, or all). Off/On. This toggle turns verbose error checking mode off or on. Builder Modes Specifies default verification mode. No save dialog Dialogs are always saved by the current name/description. No save on template change Disables save check when templates are modified. Dont verify template replace Templates are replaced without the Yes/No dialog. Dont verify template delete Templates are deleted without the Yes/No dialog. Dont erase dialog on save Dialogs are still displayed after saving. Grid Lock Specifies a grid lock number used in placing gadgets. If you set the grid lock number to 10, gadgets placed by data point are forced to x and y coordinates that are multiples of 10.
D - 32
DB Access Commands
Dial (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Dial command places a dial that can display a range of values to be used with a particular command. The values can be set by way of the FIg_set_value script function, or by a data link from another gadget.
Dialog Options
When you select Dial, the Dial dialog appears.
High Value Defines the highest value appearing on the dial. The check by the field toggles on and off to indicate that the value does (the default) or does not be display on the dial. Initial Value Defines the initial value appearing on the dial. The check by the field toggles on and off to indicate that the value does (the default) or does not be display on the dial. Increment Sets the increments the dial moves by.
Zero location Sets the starting location of the dial relative the highest value. Ticks Sets the number of ticks in a complete revolution. Units/Tick Sets the number of units the dial moves for each tick. Clockwise/Counterclockwise Determines the direction the dial moves. Length Specifies the number of characters on the dial value readout. Decimal Specifies the number of decimal places displayed for the dial values.
D - 34
DB Access Commands
Display Group (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Display Group command places a Display Group button, which displays a specified group of gadgets when selected.
Dialog Options
When you select Display Group, the Display Group dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the standard gadget options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options. Group Label The group label number assigned by DB Access when the group gadget is created. The Create/Edit Group command displays this number when the group gadget is created or edited.
Operating Sequence
Place this gadget using the standard Place Gadget operating sequence. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of this sequence. To make two Display Group gadgets, erase the other group, put them in the same group and make the group single-select. For more information see section Create/Edit Group (Dialog Builder).
D - 36
DB Access Commands
Display Labels (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Display Labels command displays the numeric label of all gadgets on the current dialog. The label can used in scripting to reference gadgets. Several Dialog Builder commands let you identify gadgets by keying in their numeric labels.
The labels disappears whenever the dialog is refreshed.

The gadgets you want to label must be placed on the current dialog.
D - 38
DB Access Commands
Display Dialog (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Display Dialog command places a Display Dialog button, which displays a dialog that you specify. This function lets you design dialogs that call other dialogs.
Dialog Options
When you select Display Dialog, the Display Dialog dialog appears.
See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options. Dialog Template This field lets you specify the dialog template associated with the button. Key in the dialog name or select it from the list indicator. At runtime, the template library in which the associated dialog template is stored must be current (specified by DBA_LIB), or listed in the library list (specified with DBA_LIST_LIB). Otherwise, DB Access cannot find the dialog template.
Preserve Invoking Dialog/Erase Invoking Dialog This toggle specifies whether the dialog with the Display Dialog button remains displayed when the new dialog is loaded, or if the invoking dialog is erased.
Operating Sequence
D - 40
DB Access Commands
Document List (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Document List command places a field that displays a document list, a list of items on which you can perform associated commands. When you select an item from the document list, the associated commands are executed.
Dialog Options
When you select Document List, the Document List dialog appears. (The following figures show the dialog with the Create Report and Named File options selected.)
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Text Font, Color, and Location options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options. Create Report/Named File This toggle specifies whether you use a report to generate the document list or use a named (ASCII) file associated with a column value in the database. Report Template This field specifies the report template used to generate the document list. You can key in a new template name or use the list indicator to select a new template. This field appears only when Create Report is selected. Schema This field specifies an RIS schema containing the table for which you want to place a document list field. You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator to select a new schema. This field appears only when Named File is selected. Table This field specifies the table containing the column for which you want to place a document list field. You can key in a new table name or use the list indicator to select a new table. This field appears only when Named File is selected. Column This field specifies the column containing the column value for which you want to place a document list field. You can key in a new column name or use the list indicator to select a new column. This field appears only when Named File is selected. Rows This field specifies the number of rows displayed at one time in the document list field. Scroll bars to the right of the document list field provide access to rows that are not displayed. Length This field specifies the character length of the rows in the document list field. You can set the length so that you see only the item name and/or description. Current Row/Current Query This toggle specifies whether the report is based on the current row or the current query. Depending on the setting, the document list is repainted when the current row changes or when you select Process Query. This toggle appears only when Create Report is selected. If Current Row is selected, only the command associated with the current row is available. Changing the current row changes the available command. If Current Query is selected, all commands associated with rows that meet the current query criteria are available from the document list field. Selecting Process Query repaints the document list. Field Options This subdialog lets you call other dialogs to set further parameters. Select from Editing, Scrolling, List, and Defaults/Verify. The respective dialogs are described in the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder).
D - 42
DB Access Commands

You must create the table that the specified report template references. You must create the report template. OR You must create the table containing the column for which the document list field is placed.
Operating Sequence
Draw Arc (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Draw Arc command places a Draw Arc button, which lets you place an arc redline on the raster image.
Dialog Options
When you select Draw Arc, the Draw Arc dialog appears.
D - 44
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Draw Arrow (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Draw Arrow command places a Draw Arrow button, which lets you place an arrow redline on the raster image.
Dialog Options
When you select Draw Arrow, the Draw Arrow dialog appears.
D - 46
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Draw Block (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Draw Block command places a Draw Block button, which lets you place an block redline on the raster image.
Dialog Options
When you select Draw Block, the Draw Block dialog appears.
D - 48
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Draw Circle (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Draw Circle command places a Draw Circle button, which lets you place a circle redline on the raster image.
Dialog Options
When you select Draw Circle, the Draw Circle dialog appears.
D - 50
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Draw Ellipse (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Draw Ellipse command places a Draw Ellipse button, which lets you place a ellipse redline on the raster image.
Dialog Options
When you select Draw Ellipse, the Draw Ellipse dialog appears.
D - 52
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Draw Filled Block (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Draw Filled Block command places a Draw Filled Block button, which lets you place a filled block redline on the raster image.
Dialog Options
When you select Draw Filled Block, the Draw Filled Block dialog appears.
D - 54
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Draw Filled Circle (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Draw Filled Circle command places a Draw Filled Circle button, which lets you place a filled circle redline on the raster image.
Dialog Options
When you select Draw Filled Circle, the Draw Filled Circle dialog appears.
D - 56
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Draw Filled Ellipse (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Draw Filled Ellipse command places a Draw Filled Ellipse button, which lets you place a filled ellipse redline on the raster image.
Dialog Options
When you select Draw Filled Ellipse, the Draw Filled Ellipse dialog appears.
D - 58
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Draw Filled Shape (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Draw Filled Shape command places a Draw Filled Shape button, which lets you place a filled shape redline on the raster image.
Dialog Options
When you select Draw Filled Shape, the Draw Filled Shape dialog appears.
D - 60
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Draw Freehand (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Draw Freehand command places a Draw Freehand button, which lets you freehand redlines on the raster image.
Dialog Options
When you select Draw Freehand, the Draw Freehand dialog appears.
D - 62
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Draw Line (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Draw Line command places a Draw Line button, which lets you place a line redline on the raster image.
Dialog Options
When you select Draw Line, the Draw Line dialog appears.
D - 64
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Draw Shape (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Draw Shape command places a Draw Shape button, which lets you place an shape redline on the raster image.
Dialog Options
When you select Draw Shape, the Draw Shape dialog appears.
D - 66
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Draw Symbol (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Draw Symbol command places a Draw Symbol button, which lets you place an symbol redline on the raster image.
Dialog Options
When you select Draw Symbol, the Draw Symbol dialog appears.
D - 68
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Draw Text (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Draw Text command places a Draw Text button, which lets you place an text redline on the raster image.
Dialog Options
When you select Draw Text, the Draw Text dialog appears.
D - 70
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Drop From Group (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Drop From Group command lets you drop a gadget from an existing group.
D - 72
DB Access Commands
Drop Table (Schema Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Drop Table command lets you drop a table from a specified schema. All data in the table and any associated indexes are deleted.
Dialog Options
When you select Drop Table, the Drop Table dialog appears.
Schema This field specifies the schema from which the table is dropped. You can enter a new schema name using key in or the list indicator. Table This field specifies the table you want to drop. You can enter a new table name using key in or the list indicator. Drop Table This button removes the table from the schema along with all data in the table and any associated indexes. The Drop Table command may fail if any views exist which reference the table.
Dump Template
Dialog Builder:
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Report Builder:
The Dump Template command provides an ASCII dump of a report or dialog template file. The file contains general information about the report or dialog. It also contains specific information about lines and columns. The dump is a debugging tool showing such things as field size and type, sorts, print conditions, and other details associated with a report template. Any errors that DB Access detects are reported on the Errors Detected dialog when the template is dumped.
D - 74
DB Access Commands
Dialog Options
When you select Dump Template, the Dump Template dialog appears.
Filename This field specifies the filename for the template dump. You can key in the full or relative pathname. Any file with the same name is overwritten.
DB Access Commands E - 1
Edit Code (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Edit Code command lets you display, edit, and insert values in a code list. You can also select a code list value for a coded column in the current row. You can use coded columns to limit the values that are valid for a column. A coded column accepts only data that is contained in a code list, a unique set of values stored in a join table. A join table can contain more than one code list. Coded columns are indicated by a (c) to the left of the column name on the Database Edit dialog. In the following example, the coded column region has been added to the manufacturer table. By default, the code list value generated for slot one is *UNK*, which stands for unknown.
E-2
DB Access Commands
Dialog Options
When you select a coded column and Edit Code, the Edit Code dialog appears.
<column> Code List - n Slot(s) This text string displays the name of the coded column. n is the number of values contained in the code list. Code List Values This field lists the code column and text column values for the code list. Add Code Slot This button lets you add slots to the code list. When you add a code list slot, you add a row in the join table that contains the code list. The code slot number is contained in the code column and the value you enter is contained in the text column. Edit/Select This toggle lets you place the code list field in edit mode (dark gray) or select mode (light gray). When the field is in edit mode, you can edit code list values or add new slots. When the field is in select mode, you can select a code list value to insert in the coded column for the current row.

You must have created a coded column in a database table, or you must be using an Intergraph application that supports coded columns. The table you add code list values to must have a means of unique row identification (mslink, mscatalog.key_columns, or unique index). For more information, see the section DB Access Reserved Tables.
Operating Sequence
1. 2. Select the column field for a coded column. Select Edit Code. The Edit Code dialog appears, displaying the code list for the coded column. If you have selected a new coded column, the code list contains only the *UNK* value. 3. Add a new value to the code list. a. Select Add Code Slot. A new code slot is inserted. The cursor appears in the text field for the new code slot. b. Key in the value you want to add to the code list. The code list value is added. The join table is updated to include the new code column and text column values.
4.
Repeat Step 3 to add other code list entries. OR Select Cancel to dismiss the Edit Code dialog.
Deleting Code List Slots

To delete slots from a code list, you must delete the associated rows from the join table that contains the code list values. If you insert a row for the join table into the mscatalog table, you can use Database Edit to delete join table rows. Using Database Edit to add code list slots is not recommended. You should use the Edit Code dialog to add code list slots.
E-4
DB Access Commands
DB Access stores code lists in memory. Any changes made to the code list outside of the Edit Code dialog are not recognized until you exit and reinvoke DB Access or rebuild the code list by calling the script function dba_flush_schema or dba_flush_codelist.
Entering Code List Values for a Row

Once you have established a code list for a coded column, you can use the code list values to edit rows in the attached database. You can enter code-list values in the following ways: 1. Select a coded column in the current row and key in:
#n#
where n is the code slot number. The corresponding text value is entered for the column. 2. 3. Select the coded column and key in a valid text column value. Select the coded column and select Edit Code. Set the Edit/Select toggle to Select. Select a value from the Edit Code dialog. The code list value is added to the current row.
Edit Code (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Edit Code command places an Edit Code button, which lets you display and select from the code list associated with a coded column. You can also let the user edit and insert code list values. Code lists are used in many Intergraph applications to limit the number of valid values for a column field. You can set up coded columns with the Create/Alter Table function in the Schema Edit utility. See sections DB Access Reserved Tables.
E-6
DB Access Commands
Dialog Options
When you select Edit Code, the Edit Code dialog appears.
Edit Allowed/No Edit Allowed This toggle lets you grant or deny edit privileges on the code list to users. If you select Edit Allowed, the user can display and select from the code list, edit code list values, and insert new values. If you select No Edit Allowed, the user can only display and select from the code list.
Operating Sequence
Edit Dialog Parameters (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Edit Dialog Parameters command lets you modify certain parameters for the current dialog.
Dialog Options
When you select Edit Dialog Parameters, the Edit Dialog Parameters dialog appears.
E-8
DB Access Commands
Database Hook This toggle is set to Database if the dialog is associated with a table in a database. Otherwise, the dialog does not represent any table, or represents the current table. The Schema and Table fields are active only if the Database setting is selected. Schema This field specifies the schema which contains the table associated with the dialog. You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator to select a new schema. Table This field specifies the table associated with the dialog. You can key in a new table name or use the list indicator to select a new table. Relations This field specifies a Relations Template to be associated with this dialog, to satisfy secondary table column fields. For more information see Edit Relations. Name This field specifies the current dialog name. To rename the current dialog, key in a maximum of 20 characters with no embedded spaces. Description This field specifies a description of the dialog. To change the description, key in up to 50 characters. Order Columns This field lets you determine the order in which rows are displayed. Key in a comma-delimited list of columns. You can specify ascending (ASC) or descending (DESC) order for each column. Ascending is the default. In the dialog shown, for example, the order clause mfr_name ASC, price DESC would order the rows in ascending order by manufacturer name and, for each manufacturer, in descending order by price. Dialog Script This field lets you specify a script to be associated with the dialog. You can key in a supported DB Access script, key in the name of a valid script template, or use the list indicator to select a script template from the current template library. This script is executed whenever the dialog appears. If you want the script to be executed only once, include logic to abort after processing once.
Notify Script This field lets you specify a script to be processed whenever input is made to the dialog operation. You can key in a supported DB Access script, key in the name of a valid script template, or use the list indicator to select a script template from the current template library. Location This group of gadgets determines the origin, width, and height for the current dialog. Screen pixels are the units of measurement for any location key-in in Dialog Builder. To resize a dialog, you can use either the standard window Modify/Resize icon or key in new coordinates in the Location fields.
X Origin This field displays the x coordinate for the upper left corner of the dialog. Y Origin This field displays the y coordinate for the upper left corner of the dialog. Width This field displays the width of the dialog in screen pixels. Height This field displays the height of the dialog in screen pixels. Scaling This checkbox determines whether automatic scaling is employed if you resize the dialog. If scaling is ON, text and gadgets are scaled proportionally if you change the size of the dialog. If scaling is OFF, text and gadgets remain the same size if a user resizes the dialog. Scaling is applicable only when the Resizing toggle is set to ON the dialog is resize. Resizing This checkbox determines whether users you can resize the dialog during runtime. If resizing is ON, the size of the dialog can be changed with the standard window Modify/Resize icon. If resizing is OFF, you cannot change the size of the dialog. CR Required This checkbox determines whether a Carraige Return is required before input to a text box on the dialog is processed. Cancel Children This checkbox when set causes all dialogs displayed from this dialog to be cancelled when this dialog is cancelled. Application Modal This checkbox when set, forces the user to process this dialog before input is accepted to any other dialog. Color This button calls a color dialog which lets you choose the background color for the dialog. Start Gadget This field lets you specify which gadget is current when the dialog is displayed.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit Dialog Parameter from the Dialog Builder dialog. The Edit Dialog Parameters dialog appears. 2. Modify any of the displayed values. Select OK to implement the changes. OR Select Cancel to retain the original values.
E - 10
DB Access Commands
Edit Field
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Edit Field command lets you edit parameters associated with a field on a report template. The type of field you select determines which parameters can be edited. To save changes made to the field, you must save the template. See the section Save Report. When you select Edit Field and a field, the dialog used to place that field appears. For example, if you select a text field, the Text Field dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Field and Edit from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select Field appears. 2. Select the field you want to edit. The dialog used to place the field appears. 3. 4. Edit any available parameters you want to change. Select OK. The field is updated in the report template. OR Select Cancel to end the edit.
Edit Gadget (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Edit Gadget (Dialog Builder) command lets you edit parameters associated with a gadget on a dialog template. You can edit any gadget placed with a Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) command. The type of gadget you select determines which parameters can be edited. When you select Edit Gadget and a gadget, the dialog used to place that gadget appears. For example, if you select a Process Query button, the Process Query dialog displays.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Gadget and then Edit from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select gadget or key in label appears. 2. Select a gadget (field, function button, line, rectangle, bezel, or text) on the current dialog or key in the numeric label for the gadget (obtained by selecting the Display Labels command from the Dialog Builder menu panel). The gadget highlights, and the prompt Accept/reject gadget appears. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. 3. To accept the gadget, tap the left mouse button or press Return. The dialog used to place the gadget appears. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the gadget you chose. Return to Step 2.
E - 12
DB Access Commands
4. 5.
Edit any available parameters you want to change. Select OK. The gadget is updated in the dialog template. OR Select Cancel to end the edit. You must save the dialog template to the attached template library for the edit to be saved permanently. For more information, see the section: Save Dialog (Dialog Builder).
Edit Line
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Edit Line command lets you edit the parameters for lines in a report template. You can modify line type, print conditions, table information, and other parameters. To save changes made to a line, you must save the template. See the section Save Report.
Dialog Options
When you select Edit Line and a line, the Edit Line dialog appears.
Single table/All tables These radio buttons specify whether the line is processed against a specific (single) table or against all tables in the attached database. Select All tables for common lines (such as page headings) in an unrelated tables report. Select Single table for all other report lines.
E - 14
DB Access Commands
You cannot place column or numeric fields on All table lines. Schema This field specifies the schema which contains the table associated with the line. You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator to select a new schema. This field is labeled Structure for userdata and ASCII reports. Table This field specifies the table associated with the line. You can key in a new table name or use the list indicator to select a new table. The Schema and Table fields are active only if the Single table setting is selected. Line Type This checklist specifies the current line type. Preface These lines print once at the beginning of a report. After all preface lines are printed, the report continues on a new page. You can use preface lines to print a cover sheet, title page, or legend. Top These lines print once at the top of every page. Page headings, column headings, date, time, and page number are included in the top lines of default reports created with the Load Default command. Body These lines print once for every row in the input universe. They usually contain column fields. Bottom These lines print once at the bottom of every page. Page numbers or footnotes can be printed with bottom lines. Final These lines print once at the end of the report. You can use final lines to print report summaries or report totals. Blank Lines Before This field specifies the number of blank lines that print before the line. Blank Lines After This field specifies the number of blank lines that print after the line. Print Condition This field lets you specify a condition which must exist for the line to print. If Print Condition is blank, the line is always printed.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Line and Edit from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select Line appears.
2.
Select the line you want to edit. The Edit Line dialog appears, displaying the values for the selected line.
3. 4.
Edit any available parameters you want to change. Select OK. The line is updated in the report template. OR Select Cancel to end the edit.
E - 16
DB Access Commands
Edit Privileges (Schema Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Edit Privileges command lets you grant or revoke privileges for available RIS schemas. DB Access uses the information you provide on the Edit Privileges dialog to build SQL grant or revoke statements. For information on privilege types or SQL statement syntax, see the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual. Granting and revoking access on a relation through RIS affects only RIS. Privileges on the underlying database system are not affected.
Dialog Options
When you select Edit Privileges, the Edit Privileges dialog appears.
Table Privileges This area contains gadgets for granting or revoking table privileges.
Grant Privilege. This button grants table privileges to one or more schemas. Specify the schemas and the privileges before selecting Grant Privilege. Revoke Privilege. This button revokes table privileges from schemas. Specify the schemas and the privileges before selecting Revoke Privilege. Schema. This field specifies the schema that contains the tables for which you are granting or revoking privileges. Tables. This field lists the tables in the specified schema. Select the tables for which you are granting/revoking privileges. Schemas to Grant Privileges to. This field lists the schemas in the schema list. Select the schemas to which you are granting or from which you are revoking privileges. Privileges. This checklist lets you select the privileges to grant or revoke. Grant Option. This toggle specifies whether the schema being granted privileges can grant privileges to other schemas. A schema can grant only those privileges granted to it.
E - 18
DB Access Commands
Edit Query (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Edit Query command lets you review, edit, or save the current query criteria, or load a query template from a template library.
Dialog Options
When you select Edit Query, the Edit Query dialog appears.
Schema This field specifies the schema containing the table for which the query is created. You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator to select a new schema. Table This field specifies the table to be searched for column values matching the query criteria. You can key in a new table name or use the list indicator to select a new table. Query This key-in field displays the current query (if any). You can edit the query or key in a new query. Load Query This button calls the Load From Library dialog, which lets you load a query criteria template. For more information, see the section Load From Library. Save Query This button calls the Save Template dialog, which lets you save a query criteria template. For a description of this dialog, see the section Save Options.
Edit Query (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Edit Query command places an Edit Query button, which displays an Edit Query dialog. From the dialog you can view, edit, and save the current query criteria, or load a query template from the attached template library.
Dialog Options
When you select Edit Query, the Edit Query dialog appears.
E - 20
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Edit Report Parameters
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Edit Report Parameters command lets you modify certain parameters for the current report template.
Dialog Options
When you select Edit Report Parameters, the Edit Report Parameters dialog appears.
Single table/Unrelated tables This toggle lets you specify whether the report is a single table or an unrelated tables report.
E - 22
DB Access Commands
Select Single table to specify a table that is the only table reported on or that is the primary table in a join columns operation. Select Unrelated tables when you want to report on tables that do not share a join column. The Schema and Table fields are active only if the Single table setting is selected. Schema This field specifies the schema which contains the table associated with the report. You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator to select a new schema. This field is labeled Structure for user data and ASCII reports. Table This field specifies the table associated with the report. You can key in a new table name or use the list indicator to select a new table. Type This checklist specifies the current template type (Database, Userdata, ASCII, or Binary). Name This field specifies the current report template name. To rename the template, key in a maximum of 20 characters with no embedded spaces. Description This field specifies a description of the template. To change the description, key in up to 50 characters. Output This field displays the default output filename. Key in up to 50 characters to name a different output file. If the output filename is stdout, no file is created. The report output is sent to the DB Access standard output device which, by default, is the invoking window. Characters Per Line This field displays the page width. Key in a number from 1 to 2000. You can edit templates that are wider than the screen by using the Shift Left and Shift Right arrows at the bottom of the Report Builder dialog.
Lines Per Page This field specifies when page breaks occur. Key in a number from 0 to 999. (0 creates a file without page breaks.) Relations This field specifies a Relations Template to be associated with this dialog, to satisfy secondary table column fields. For more information, see Edit Relations. It is not possible to switch from Report Scripting to User Action. Report Scripting is the recommended interpreter.
Erase Fence (Raster Graphics)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Erase Fence command erases the selected fence in the raster image in the specified window. To use the command, select Erase Fence and then a window.
E - 24
DB Access Commands
Exit
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Exit command is available in several places in DB Access.
To Exit the Dialog Builder
Select Exit from the Dialog Builder menu bar. If you have modified the current dialog, the Save Dialog dialog is called, which lets you write the current dialog template before leaving Dialog Builder. See the section Save Dialog (Dialog Builder) for information on using this dialog.
You are returned to the Program Manager Window.
To Exit the Report Builder
Select Exit from the Report Builder menu bar. If you have modified the current report template, the Save Report dialog is called, which lets you write the current report template before loading another from the template library. See the section Save Report for information on using this dialog. You are returned to the Program Manager Window.
E - 26
DB Access Commands
Expanded Summary (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Expanded Summary command displays a listing of the gadgets on the current dialog. All of the gadget parameters except the gadget label can be edited from the Expanded Summary dialog.
Dialog Options
When you select Expanded Summary, the Expanded Summary dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Options on the Toolbar menu. Select Expanded Summary from the pulldown menu. The Expanded Summary dialog appears. 2. 3. Edit any parameters you choose. (Editable parameters become active when selected.) Select Close when finished.
E - 28
DB Access Commands
DB Access Commands F - 1
Fence Block (Raster Graphics)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Fence Block command lets you select a portion of the raster image in the specified window. To use the command, select Fence Block and then a window.
F-2
DB Access Commands
Fence Copy (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Fence Copy (Dialog Builder) command copies a fenced area on the current dialog one or more times.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit on the Toolbar menu. Select Fence and Copy on the pulldown menus. The prompt Select fence origin appears. 2. Click the left mouse button to define the first corner of a fence that encompasses the group of gadgets you want to copy. The prompt Select opposite corner appears. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. 3. Click the left mouse button to define the opposite corner of the fence. The gadgets within the boundaries of the fence highlight, and the prompt Accept/reject fence appears. 4. Click the left mouse button to accept the fence. The fence attaches to the cursor in drag mode. The prompt Select placement point appears. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the fence. Return to Step 2.
5.
Move the cursor to a new location on the dialog. The x,y coordinates display in the message area so you can position the fenced area on the dialog.
6.
Click the left mouse button. A copy of the fenced area is placed at the new location.
7.
Return to Step 5 to place another copy of the gadget in a new location. OR Click the right mouse button to define a new fenced area to copy. Return to Step 2. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command.
F-4
DB Access Commands
Fence Delete (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Fence Delete (Dialog Builder) command deletes a fenced area containing multiple gadgets on the displayed dialog. You define a fenced area by placing a data point in the upper left corner of the area (the fence origin) and another in the lower right corner.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Edit and Delete from the pulldown menus. Tap the left mouse button to define the first corner of a fence that encompasses the gadgets you want to delete. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. 3. Click the left mouse button to define the opposite corner of the fence. The gadgets within the fence highlight, and the prompt Accept/reject fence appears. 4. Click the left mouse button to accept the fence. The gadgets within the fence are deleted. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the fence. The gadgets within the fence are not deleted.
2.
5.
Return to Step 2 to define another fence. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command.
F-6
DB Access Commands
Fence Edit (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Fence Edit (Dialog Builder) command lets you edit parameters associated with gadget labels in a fenced area.
Dialog Options
When you select Fence Edit (Dialog Builder), the Fence/Group Edit dialog appears.
Choose Font This button calls the Font dialog, which is described in the following section. Font Select this box to implement a change in the font. If the box is not selected, the gadget labels retain their current font. Font Style Select this box to implement a change in the font style. If the box is not selected, the gadget labels retain their current font style. Size Select this box to implement a change in the size of the type. If the box is not selected, the gadget labels retain their current size.
Choose Font
Font This field displays the current style of type. You can key in a new typeface or select one from the list below. Font Style This field displays the current font style. You can select a new font style from the list below. Size This field displays the current size of type. You can key in a new bodysize or select one from the list below. Sample Type This field displays an example of the current font.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Fence and Edit from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select fence origin appears. 2. Click the left mouse button to define the first corner of a fence that encompass the group of gadgets whose labels you want to edit. The prompt Select opposite corner appears. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. 3. Click the middle mouse button to define the opposite corner of the fence. The gadgets within the boundaries of the fence highlight, and the prompt Accept/reject fence appears. 4. Click the left mouse button to accept the fence.
F-8
DB Access Commands
The Fence/Group Edit dialog appears. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the fence. Return to Step 2. 5. 6. Edit any available parameters you want to change. Select OK. The gadgets are updated. OR Select Cancel to end the edit. You must save the dialog template to the attached template library for the edit to be saved permanently with the template. See the section Save Dialog (Dialog Builder).
Fence Move (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Fence Move (Dialog Builder) command moves a fenced area containing multiple gadgets. You define a fenced area by placing a data point in the upper left corner of the area (the fence origin) and another in the lower right corner. The fenced area attaches to the cursor in drag mode, letting you move the fenced area interactively on the dialog.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Fence and Move from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select fence origin appears. 2. Click the left mouse button to define the first corner of a fence that will encompass the group of gadgets you want to move. The prompt Select opposite corner appears. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. 3. Click the left mouse button to define the opposite corner of the fence. The gadgets within the boundaries of the fence highlight, and the prompt Accept/reject fence appears. 4. Click the left mouse button to accept the fence.
F - 10
DB Access Commands
The fence attaches to the cursor in drag mode. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the fence. Return to Step 2. 5. Move the fence to a new location on the dialog. The x,y coordinates display in the message area so you can position the fenced gadgets on the dialog. 6. Click the left mouse button. The fenced gadgets are placed at a new location on the dialog. 7. Return to Step 2.
Fence Operations (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Fence Operations (Report Builder) command calls the following panel:
The Fence Operations (Dialog Builder) command contains the edit, copy, move, delete and undelete functions on the pulldown menu. Because a fenced area can contain any number of gadgets, fence operations are useful for executing the same command on several gadgets.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Fence Operations (Dialog Builder) from the Dialog Builder menu bar.
F - 12
DB Access Commands
Fence Shape (Raster Graphics)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Fence Shape command lets you select a portion of the raster image in the specified window. To use the command, select Fence Shape and then a window.
Field Format (Report Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Field Format command lets you associate a format with a field in a report template. The format modifies the field as it is printed out to the report. You must save the report template to save the field formats you have established.
Dialog Options
When you select Field Format and select the field to format, the DBA Special Field Formats dialog for that field appears.
F - 14
DB Access Commands
Convert to Feet - Inches This option converts a numeric field to feet and inches format. The initial field is assumed to be in inches. For example, if a wall length is stored in a database as 136.75 inches, the formatted field prints the report output as 11-4 3/4". If a field is not stored as inches in the input data, it is usually easier to convert it to inches (by way of a derived field) and then use the field format rather than convert it to a feet-inches format. Convert to Fraction This option converts a floating point field to a fraction. For example, a 136.75 inch wall length is printed as 136 3/4. Fractions are rounded to the nearest 1/8th. Variable Start This option prints the field in the column represented by an integer user variable. Select this format to stagger the start of report fields according to a predetermined value or condition. User Variable. This field lets you specify the user variable that contains the integer value. Suppress This option suppresses the number of blanks between two fields. Select Suppress for the second of two fields to define the number of blanks between the end of the data in the first field and the start of the second field. Select this option for fields that should print with only one or two blanks between them, regardless of the length of their text. For example: Last_name, First_name or City, State Zip_Code
You can also use Suppress to create a free format file to be used as input for another process. Blanks. This field lets you specify the number of blanks inserted before the field. Zero Fill This option replaces leading blanks in a numeric field with zeros. By default, DB Access does not print leading zeros in a numeric field. Auto Wrap This option automatically wraps lengthy text in a field to a second line in the report output. You must specify a field length on the report template that is shorter than the length of the associated column. The text is broken at the last blank before the specified field length. Justification Format This checklist lets you specify how the field is aligned. Select Right Justify, Center Justify, or Left Justify.
Fields On/Off (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Fields On/Off command toggles all column fields off or on. You can turn an individual field on or off by selecting the fields corresponding column name (for example, part_num, mfr_name, and so on). By default, all column fields on the Database Edit dialog are on (the field is dark gray). Off fields (light gray) are not included in universe reviews.
F - 16
DB Access Commands
Fields On/Off (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Fields On/Off command places a Fields On/Off button, which toggles all column fields on or off. (Off fields are not included in universe reviews generated by the Review button).
Dialog Options
When you select Fields On/Off, the Fields On/Off dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
F - 18
DB Access Commands
Field Operations (Report Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Field Operations (Report Builder) command calls the following panel:
The Field Operations (Report Builder) command contains the edit, copy, move, delete, and undelete functions on the pulldown menu to field commands from line commands. 1. 2. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Field from the pulldown menu. Select the command that you want to execute.
Field Plus (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Field Plus command places a field plus on the current dialog. A Field Plus gadget is a custom control that offers I/Forms functionality.
Dialog Options
When you select Field Plus, the Field PLUS dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
F - 20
DB Access Commands
Fit View (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Fit View command places a Fit View button, which displays an entire raster document in the specified window.
Dialog Options
When you select Fit View, the Fit View dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
F - 22
DB Access Commands
Fit (Raster Graphics)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Fit command displays an entire raster document in the specified window. To use the command, select Fit and then a window.
DB Access Commands G - 1
Gadget Groups (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Grouping gadgets make it easier to change their attributes with a single FI script function or a single Dialog Builder command. The Gadget Groups command calls the following panel of gadget group commands:
Create/Edit This command lets you create and edit gadget groups. See the section Create/Edit Group (Dialog Builder). Drop From This command lets you drop a gadget from a group. See the section Drop From Group (Dialog Builder). Delete This command lets you delete the group status of a gadget group. See the section Delete Group (Dialog Builder). Show This button lets you highlight all the gadgets in a given group. See the section Show Group (Dialog Builder).
G-2
DB Access Commands
Gadget Operations (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Gadget Operations (Dialog Builder) command calls the following panel:
The Gadget Operations (Dialog Builder) commands contains the edit, copy, move, delete and undelete functions on the pulldown menu.
Operating Sequence
1. 2. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Gadget from the pulldown menu. Select the command that you want to execute.
Gadget Sequencing (Dialog Builder)

The Gadget Sequencing command calls the following palette:
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Create This button lets you define a sequence for users to follow. See the section Create Sequence (Dialog Builder). Review This button lets you review an existing sequence. See the section Review Sequence (Dialog Builder). Delete This button lets you delete linkages in an existing sequence. See the section Delete Sequence (Dialog Builder). Auto This button automatically sequences non-coded single column fields and user fields. See the section Auto Sequence (Dialog Builder).
G-4
DB Access Commands
Gauge (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Gauge command places a gauge with a range of values to be used with a particular command.
Dialog Options
When you select Gauge, the Gauge dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Text Font, Color, and Location options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options. High Value Defines the highest value appearing on the gauge. Initial Value Defines the initial value appearing on the gauge. Vertical/Horizontal Determines the direction the gauge moves.
General Utilities (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The General Utilities command calls a menu panel that lets you place gadgets to perform such functions as executing a system command or exiting a dialog.
Cancel This button places a Cancel button, which exits you from the current dialog or cancels a process. See the section Cancel (Dialog Builder). Display Dialog This button places a Display Dialog button, which displays a dialog that you specify. See the section Display Dialog (Dialog Builder). Display Group This button places a Display Group button, which displays a group of undisplayed gadgets. See the section Display Group (Dialog Builder). Document List This button places a Document List field, which generates a list of files on which you can execute commands. See the section Document List (Dialog Builder). Multi Gadget This button lets you associate multiple commands with one function button. Thus, you can place one button that performs several functions in succession. See the section Multi Gadget (Dialog Builder). Help This button places a Help button, which invokes on-line Help. See the section Help (Dialog Builder). System Command This button lets you place a System Command button, which executes a system command. See the section System Command (Dialog Builder).
G-6
DB Access Commands
Grid (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Grid command places a grid on the current dialog, for multi-column text selection.
Dialog Options
When you select Grid, the Grid dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
Grid Lock (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Grid Lock command lets you specify a grid lock number used in placing gadgets by data point. The gadgets are forced to the nearest screen pixel coordinate that is a multiple of the grid lock number. For example, if you set the grid lock number to 10, gadgets placed by data point are forced to x and y coordinates that are multiples of 10. The grid lock setting can be saved as part of a design options template, using the Save Options command. The grid lock is also used by the Snap to Grid command.
Dialog Options
When you select Grid Lock, the Grid Lock dialog appears.
G-8
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
1. Select Options from the Toolbar menu, then select Grid Lock... from the pulldown menu. The Grid Lock dialog appears. 2. Position the cursor on top of the slider, hold down the middle mouse button, and move the cursor right to make the grid lock number larger or left to make the grid lock number smaller. OR Enter a value for the grid lock number in the key-in field.
Group Box (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Group Box command places a group box on the current dialog, to group a set of likefunctioned gadgets.
Dialog Options
When you select Group Box, the Group Box dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
G - 10
DB Access Commands
Group Copy (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Group Copy (Dialog Builder) command copies a gadget group on the current dialog one or more times.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Group and then Copy from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select gadget or key in label appears. 2. Select a gadget (field, function button, line, rectangle, bezel, or text) in the group you are copying on the current dialog or key in the numeric label of any gadget in the group (obtained by selecting the Display Labels command from the Dialog Builder menu panel). The gadget highlights, and the prompt Accept/reject gadget appears. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. 3. To accept the gadget, Click the left mouse button or press Return>. The gadgets in the gadget group highlight, and the prompt Accept/reject group appears. 4. Click the left mouse button to accept the gadget group. The group attaches to the cursor in drag mode. The prompt Select placement point appears. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the group. Return to Step 2.
5.
Move the cursor to a new location on the dialog. The x,y coordinates display in the message area so you can position the gadget group on the dialog.
6.
click the left mouse button. A copy of the gadget group is placed at the new location.
7.
Return to Step 5 to place another copy of the gadget group in a new location. OR Click the right mouse button to define a new gadget group to copy. Return to Step 2. OR Double click the right mouse button to exit the command.
G - 12
DB Access Commands
Group Delete (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Group Delete (Dialog Builder) command deletes a gadget group on the current dialog.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Group and then Delete from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select gadget or key in label appears. 2. Select a gadget (field, function button, line, rectangle, bezel, or text) in the group you are deleting on the current dialog or key in the numeric label of any gadget in the group (obtained by selecting the Display Labels command from the Dialog Builder menu panel). The gadget highlights, and the prompt Accept/reject gadget appears. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. 3. To accept the gadget, click the left mouse button or press Return. The gadgets in the gadget group highlight, and the prompt Accept/reject group appears. 4. Click the left mouse button to accept the gadget group. The gadget group is deleted. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the gadget group.
The gadget group is not deleted. 5. Return to Step 2 to select another gadget group. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command.
G - 14
DB Access Commands
Group Edit (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Group Edit (Dialog Builder) command lets you edit parameters associated with a gadget group.
Dialog Options
When you select Group Edit (Dialog Builder), the Fence/Group Edit dialog appears.
Choose Font This button calls the Font dialog, which is described in the following section. Font Select this box to implement a change in the font. If the box is not selected, the gadget labels retain their current font. Font Style Select this box to implement a change in the font style. If the box is not selected, the gadget labels retain their current font style. Size Select this box to implement a change in the size of the type. If the box is not selected, the gadget labels retain their current size.
Choose Font
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Group and the Edit from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select gadget or key in label appears. 2. Click the left mouse button to define the first corner of a fence that encompass the group of gadgets whose labels you want to edit. The prompt Select opposite corner appears. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. 3. Click the left mouse button to define the opposite corner of the fence. The gadgets within the boundaries of the fence highlight, and the prompt Accept/reject fence appears.
G - 16
DB Access Commands
4.
Click the left mouse button to accept the fence. The Fence/Group Edit dialog appears. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the fence. Return to Step 2.
5. 6.
Edit any available parameters you want to change. Select OK. The gadget labels are updated. OR Select Cancel to end the edit. You must save the dialog template to the attached template library for the edit to be saved permanently with the template. See the section Save Dialog (Dialog Builder).
Group Move (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Group Move (Dialog Builder) command moves a gadget group on the current dialog one or more times. This command is also available from the DBA toolbar.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Group and then Move from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select gadget or key in label appears. 2. Select a gadget (field, function button, line, rectangle, bezel, or text) in the group you are moving on the current dialog or key in the numeric label of any gadget in the group (obtained by selecting the Display Labels command from the Dialog Builder menu panel). The gadget highlights, and the prompt Accept/reject gadget appears. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. 3. To accept the gadget, click the left mouse button or press Return. The gadgets in the gadget group highlight, and the prompt Accept/reject group appears. 4. Click the left mouse button to accept the gadget group.
G - 18
DB Access Commands
The group attaches to the cursor in drag mode. The prompt Select placement point appears. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the group. Return to Step 2. 5. Move the cursor to a new location on the dialog. The x,y coordinates display in the message area so you can position the gadget group on the dialog. 6. Click the left mouse button. The gadget group is placed at the new location. 7. Return to Step 2.
Group Operations (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Group Operations (Dialog Builder) command calls the following panel:
The Group Operations (Dialog Builder) command contains edit, copy, move, delete, and undelete functions on the pulldown menu to group commands from gadget commands. Group commands perform operations on gadget groups.
Operating Sequence
Select Edit from the Toolbar menu and then select Group from the pulldown menu.
G - 20
DB Access Commands
DB Access Commands H - 1
Help (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Help command places a Help button, which invokes on-line Help.
Dialog Options
When you select Help, the Help dialog appears.
H-2
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
DB Access Commands I - 1
Initialize Query (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Initialize Query command clears the current query criteria. If you select Initialize Query and then Process Query, a universe of all rows in the current table is generated.
I-2
DB Access Commands
Initialize Query (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Initialize Query command places an Initialize Query button, which initializes (clears) the current query criteria.
Dialog Options
When you select Initialize Query, the Initialize Query dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
I-4
DB Access Commands
Insert Row (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Insert Row command inserts a new row in the attached database. The new row contains the column values currently displayed. If there are no restrictions on duplicate column values in the database, you can use Insert Row to create a row that contains the same values as the current row. Only the mslink value (if the column exists) is changed. DB Access automatically increments the mslink value for each new row in the database. Insert Row cannot create a new row if: 1. A column is a serial column (INFORMIX), a key column (defined in mscatalog), or defines a unique index AND
2.
The column value for the new row is not unique.
The Update Active command lets you change currently displayed values for the row to be inserted without changing the corresponding value for the current row. For more information, see the section Update Active (Database Edit).
Insert Row (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Insert Row command places an Insert Row button, which inserts a new row based on the column values for the displayed row. The user selects Update Active, enters data for the new row, and then selects Insert Row to insert the displayed data as a row in the database.
Dialog Options
When you select Insert Row, the Insert Row dialog appears.
I-6
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Insert Space (Report Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Insert Space (Report Builder) command lets you insert spaces between fields in a report template. All fields to the right of the cursor are moved to the right. You can use the Delete Field and Undelete Field commands to align fields on several lines. For more information, see these sections Delete Field and Undelete Field (Report Builder).
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu and then select Insert space from the pulldown menu. Place the cursor where you want to insert spaces. Click the left mouse button once for each space. Fields to the right of the cursor are moved right. 3. Insert spaces in a new location. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command.
2.
I-8
DB Access Commands
DB Access Commands K - 1
Key Column (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Key Column command lets you perform a quick search on the database. If you key in a value for a column field, DB Access searches the database and retrieves the first row that has the same value for the column. This command provides the same functionality as an Initialize Query, Add Query, and Process Query sequence.
K-2
DB Access Commands
Key Column (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Key Column command places a Key Column button, which lets you perform a quick search on the database. If you key in a value for a column field, DB Access searches the database and retrieves the first row that has the same value for the column. This command provides the same functionality as an Initialize Query, Add Query, and Process Query sequence.
Dialog Options
When you select Key Column, the Key Column dialog appears.
DB Access Commands K - 3
Operating Sequence
K-4
DB Access Commands
DB Access Commands L - 1
Line (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Line command lets you place a line on the current dialog. You can select line style, color, depth, and weight. Lines are useful for drawing boundaries around groups of function buttons.
Dialog Options
When you select Line, the Line dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the dialog. Location This group of gadgets determines the endpoints for the line. Screen pixels are the units of measurement for any location key-in. Keyin/Data Point. This toggle lets you determine endpoints by keying in values or placing data points. X1, Y1 These fields let you key in the x and y coordinates for the origin of the line. X2, Y2 These fields let you key in the x and y coordinates for the second endpoint. Select Line Weight This button calls a dialog that lets you specify a line weight for the line you are placing. Use the slider on the dialog to select an active line weight. Select Line Style This button calls a dialog that lets you specify a line style for the line you are placing. Select the checklist box next to the style you want to use.
L-2
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Line Operations (Report Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Line Operations (Report Builder) command calls the following panels:
The Line Operations (Report Builder) command contains edit, copy, move, delete, and undelete functions on the pulldown menu to line commands from field commands.
Operating Sequence
1. 2. Select Line Operations (Report Builder) from the Dialog Builder menu bar. Select the command that you want to execute.
L-4
DB Access Commands
Line Script
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Line Script command lets you write more complex statements for a report template to process. Line scripts can perform looping, if-else-if structures, paging, multiple calculations, and other report control functions. You can define scripts to process before or after a line in a report template is printed. If the line is not printed, the after line script does not process. Scripts can also be processed before or after a sort of the input data. Line Script does not require a function name or opening and closing braces. A line script cannot include a preprocessor directive, such as #include or #define, because Report Scripting treats each line script as one long line of C code.
Dialog Options
When you select Line Script, the Line Script dialog appears.
Before Line Processing This field lets you specify line scripts to process before the line is printed. If you select a line with an existing before line script, the script appears in this field. Select the Clear button to clear the field. After Line Processing This field lets you specify line scripts to process after the line is printed. If you select a line with an existing after line script, the script appears in this field. Select the Clear button to clear the field. If the line is not printed, the after line script does not process. When the Line Script dialog appears, these fields are in edit mode. Select a field to key in a script or edit an existing one. Editor This button lets you use a specified editor to edit the text in the last active field. You can specify an editor with the EDITOR environment variable. If EDITOR is not defined, notepad is the default editor. The name of the current editor appears in the field to the right of the Editor button. To change editors, key in the name of the new editor.
L-6
DB Access Commands

The Line Script command appears on the Report Builder panel dialog if the Interpreter toggle on the Edit Report Parameters dialog is set to Report Scripting. You must define user variables before using them in line scripts.
Links Commands (Dialog Builder)

The Links Commands command calls the following panel:
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Review Element This button places a Review Element button, which reviews the linkage(s) for a graphic element in a design or raster file. See the section Review Element (Dialog Builder). Locate Graphics This button places a Locate Graphics button, which locates a graphic element with a linkage to the current row on a DB Access dialog. The graphic element highlights if a linkage exists. See the section Locate Graphics (Dialog Builder). Attach Linkage This button places an Attach Linkage button, which creates a linkage between the current row on a DB Access dialog and a graphic element. See the section Attach DB Linkage (Dialog Builder). Attach DAP Link This button places an Attach DAP Link button, which attaches a linkage from the current row to a text node in a design file. See the section Attach DAP Link (Dialog Builder). Attach Note Link This button places an Attach Note Link button, which attaches a linkage from a raster element to a text file. See the section Attach Note Link (Dialog Builder). Attach File Link This button places an Attach File Link button, which links raster elements in the same file or different files. See the section Attach File Link (Dialog Builder). Show Links This button places a Show Links button, which displays linkages in the specified window. See the section Show Links (Dialog Builder).
L-8
DB Access Commands
Linkage Mode This button places a Linkage Mode field, which lets a user select the type of database linkage created with the Attach Linkage button. See the section Linkage Mode (Dialog Builder). Remove Linkage This button places a Remove Linkage button, which removes a linkage from a graphic element. See the section Remove Linkage (Dialog Builder). Remove Fence This button places a Remove Fence button, which removes the linkage(s) on any graphic elements contained within a fence defined by the user. See the section Remove Fence (Dialog Builder). USTN Command This button places a Microstation Key-in button, which lets you associate a MicroStation key-in command with the button. When the button is selected, MicroStation receives and executes the associated command. See the section USTN Command (Dialog Builder).
Linkage Mode (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Linkage Mode command places a Linkage Mode field, which lets a user select the type of linkage created with Attach Linkage. See the section Attach DB Linkage (Database Edit).
Dialog Options
When you select Linkage Mode, the Linkage Mode dialog appears.
L - 10
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
List Box (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The List Box command places a list box on the current dialog, for text selection.
Dialog Options
When you select List Box, the List Box dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
L - 12
DB Access Commands
Load File (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Load File command places a Load File button, which displays the specified raster file.
Dialog Options
When you select Load File, the Load File dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
L - 14
DB Access Commands
Load File (Raster Graphics)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Load File command lets you display a raster file. Any DM/View supported format can be displayed. The file must be local or NFS mounted.
Load From Library
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Load From Library command calls the DBA Load From Library dialog, which lists the templates found in the current template library. Your location within DB Access (Dialog Builder, Report Builder, and so on) determines the type of template that is listed. For information about the types of templates that can be loaded from a template library, see the section Templates.
Dialog Options
When you select Load From Library, the Load From Library dialog appears.
Library This field displays the name of the current template library. To change the name, select the field, clear the field, and key in a new name. Template This field displays the name of the current template. To change the name, select the field, clear the field, and key in a new name. Type This field displays the type of template. To change the type, select the field, and either key in a new type or select one from the list.
L - 16
DB Access Commands
Load This button places the dialog in Load Template mode. Select this button if you want to load a template from the current library. To leave Load Template mode, select Load again or select one of the other buttons on the dialog. Delete This button places the dialog in Delete Template mode. Select this button if you want to delete a template from the current library. To leave Delete Template mode, select Delete again or select one of the other buttons on the dialog. Compress This button compresses the contents of the current template library to recover space from deleted or replaced templates. Name, Description, Type This field lists the name, description, and type of the templates in the template library. You can select a template to be loaded or deleted from this list. Most Recent This field lists the most recently used templates in the template library. When a template is used it becomes the first in the list. The list is cleared after each log-in. You can select templates from this field.
From Dialog Builder

1. Select Load From Library from the Dialog Builder menu bar. If you have modified the current dialog, the Save Dialog dialog is called, which lets you write the current dialog template before loading another from the template library. See the section Save Dialog (Dialog Builder) for information on using this dialog. The Load From Library dialog appears, displaying a list of the dialog templates in the current library. 2. Continue with the steps listed in the following operating sequence.
From Report Builder

1. Select Load From Library from the Report Builder menu bar. If you have modified the current dialog, the Save Report dialog is called, which lets you write the current report template before loading another from the template library. See the section Save Report for information on using this dialog. The Load From Library dialog appears, displaying a list of the report templates in the current library. Three types of report templates are listed: Database, ASCII, and Userdata. 2. Continue with the steps listed in the following operating sequence.
Operating Sequence
If you have not previously attached a template library, the Library field is blank and no templates are listed. Attach a template library by selecting the Library field and keying in the path to a valid template library file. 1. The Load function button should appear to be depressed, indicating that the dialog is in Load Template mode. Select a template from the displayed list. The specified template appears. OR Select Delete to enter Delete Template mode. a. Select a template from the displayed list. A dialog requesting confirmation of the deletion appears. b. You have two options: Select Yes to delete the template. The template is deleted from the library. Select No to abort the deletion.
OR Select Compress to compress the contents of the current template library. 2. To exit the Load Template or Delete Template mode, select the function button again or select a different button.
L - 18
DB Access Commands
Locate Graphics (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Locate Graphics command locates and highlights graphic elements with linkages to the current row. The Dialog Builder function lets you modify Locate Graphics to locate elements with linkages to the current universe, or to add the elements to a working set for further manipulation. See the section Locate Graphics (Dialog Builder).

Load a design or raster file. Make the row for which you want to locate linked graphic elements the current row.

1. Select Locate Graphics from the Database Edit dialog. The message Processing, please wait... appears, followed by the prompt Select view. OR If no elements are found with a linkage to the current row, the message Element not found appears, and DB Access exits the command. 2. Click the left mouse button in the view where you want the graphic element to display. The element is centered in the view, and the prompt Point to hilite appears. 3. Click the left mouse button in the view. The element is highlighted. DB Access exits the command.

1. Select Locate Graphics from the Database Edit dialog. DB Access highlights the element, zooms in and centers it in the window, then exits the command. OR If no elements are found with a linkage to the current row, the message No linkage present appears. DB Access exits the command.
Locate Graphics (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Locate Graphics command places a Locate Graphics button, which locates graphic elements with linkage(s) to the current row or current universe on a DB Access dialog.
Dialog Options
When you select Locate Graphics, the Locate Graphics dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Place Text/Place Symbol, Text Font, Color, and Location options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options. Current Row/Current Query This toggle determines whether elements with linkages to the current row or current universe are located.
L - 20
DB Access Commands
Hilite/Working Set Vector graphics: This toggle determines whether the located elements are highlighted or added to a working set. A working set is a group of MicroStation elements that can be manipulated at one time using MicroStation fence contents commands (move, change color, delete, and so forth). Raster graphics: This toggle determines whether the located elements are highlighted or not.
Operating Sequence
DB Access Commands M - 1
Measure (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Measure command places a Measure button, lets the user determine the distance between two points in a raster image.
Dialog Options
When you select Measure, the Measure dialog appears.
M-2
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Measure (Raster Graphics)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Measure command lets you determine the distance between two points in a raster image.
M-4
DB Access Commands
Modify Sort
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Modify Sort command lets you modify the sort keys for a report template. Sort keys define the order in which input rows from the database are processed and output through a report template. A sort key can be a text string, a column in a table, or a field derived from a calculation. You must save the report template to save the sort keys you define.
If you select the Line Script command while the Modify Sort dialog is displayed, you can specify scripts or user action statements, respectively, to process before or after input data is sorted. The Sort Script dialog functions the same as the Line Script dialog. See the section Line Script.
Dialog Options
When you select Modify Sort, the DBA Modify Sort dialog appears.
Schema This field specifies the schema containing the table in an unrelated tables report for which you want to define a sort key. You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator to select a new schema. Table This field specifies the table in an unrelated tables report for which you want to define a sort key. You can key in a new table name or use the list indicator to select a new table. The Schema and Table fields are active only when you load an unrelated tables report template. Sort, Order, Sort Value, New Page This select-only field lists the sort keys for the current report. Select a line to make it a marker (highlighted) line. The field cannot be in delete or edit mode. (That is, the Delete and Edit buttons are not depressed.) New sort keys can be added and the delete buffer inserted before a marker line. Add This button adds a sort key to the sort key list. Select Add after you enter information in the area at the bottom of the dialog. The new sort key is inserted before the marker line in the sort key list. If no marker line exists, the new sort key is inserted at the bottom of the list.
M-6
DB Access Commands
Edit This button places the dialog in edit mode. Select Edit and then select a sort key from the sort key list. The values for the sort key appear in the area at the bottom of the dialog. You can edit these values. Delete This button puts the dialog in delete mode; any line you select is deleted and stored in a delete buffer. The delete buffer stores deleted lines until you exit delete mode. Select Delete again to exit delete mode. The delete buffer is cleared whenever you enter delete mode. Undelete This button inserts the current delete buffer before the marker line in the sort key list. If no marker line exists, the delete buffer is inserted at the bottom of the list. Clear Select This button clears the currently selected sort key, so that newly added sort keys go to the bottom of the list. Otherwise, new sort keys are placed before the current sort key. Sort Type This checklist lets you select the type of sort. Text This option sorts the input rows by a text string you key in. You can use text sort keys with unrelated tables reports to specify which tables data should be sorted first. For the table containing the rows to sort first, specify a string which alphabetically precedes the string for the table containing the rows to sort second. For example, for the unrelated tables Table A and Table B, make sort key 1 a text sort for both tables. To sort the Table A rows first, key in the text string 1 for Table A and 2 for Table B. Text This field lets you specify the text string for a text sort. Column This option sorts rows according to the values for a specified column in the database. Schema This field specifies the schema containing the column by which you want to sort. You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator to select a new schema. Table This field specifies the table containing the column by which you want to sort. You can key in a new table name or use the list indicator to select a new table. Column This field specifies the column containing the values by which you want to sort. You can key in a new column name or use the list indicator to select a new column. Join Columns This button lets you review and edit the join column relationship. The button is inactive until join columns are specified. If you define sort keys for columns from more than one table on a single table report, you must specify a join column between the primary table and the secondary table. See the section Join Columns.
Code Text/Number This toggle lets you specify whether a coded column sort is by the code_number or code_text. This toggle is inactive until a coded column is specified in the Column field. Derived This option sorts input data according to the result of a formula. You can sort input rows based on a calculated value that is not represented by a column in the database. Formula This field lets you specify a formula, which can include columns, constants, and user variables. Because it is not tied to a line in the report template, a derived sort key cannot reference fields (f_1, f_2, and so on). Length This field specifies the number of characters used in the sort key. If the length were set to 2, the values ABCD and ABZZZZ would be equivalent during the sort. Sort Order This checklist lets you select the order in which rows are sorted. Ascending This option orders rows in alphabetical or numerical order: A,A,B,C,C,D or 1,1,2,2,3. Descending This option orders rows in reverse alphabetical or numerical order: D,C,C,B,A,A or 3,2,2,1,1. None This option does not sort the rows. However, sort breaks (system variables that indicate when a sort value changes) can still be used. New Page This checklist lets you select whether a page break is inserted into the report when the value of the sort key changes.
M-8
DB Access Commands
Move Field
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Move Field command moves a field on a report template.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Field and then Move from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select field appears. 2. Select a field on the report template. The field is dynamically attached to the cursor. The prompt Select placement point appears. 3. Move the field to a new location on the report template. As you move the cursor over the report template, information in the message area changes to reflect the current line, column, table, and field. DB Access uses F-1, F-2, and so on to represent the first, second, and any subsequent fields on a line. 4. Click the left mouse button to place the field. DB Access moves the field to the new position. 5. Move the field to another position. OR
Click the right mouse button to select a different field. Return to Step 2. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command.
M - 10
DB Access Commands
Move Gadget (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Move Gadget (Dialog Builder) command moves a gadget on the current dialog. The gadget attaches to the cursor in drag mode, letting you move the gadget interactively on the dialog.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Gadget and then Move from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select gadget or key in label appears. 2. Select a gadget (field, function button, line, rectangle, bezel, or text) on the current dialog or key in the numeric label for the gadget (obtained by selecting the Display Labels command from the Dialog Builder panel menu). The gadget highlights, and the prompt Accept/reject gadget appears. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. 3. To accept the gadget, click the left mouse button or press Return. The gadget attaches to the cursor in drag mode. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the gadget. Return to Step 2.
4.
Move the gadget to a new location on the dialog. The x,y coordinates display in the message area so you can position the gadget on the dialog.
5.
Click the left mouse button. The gadget is placed at a new location on the dialog.
6.
Return to Step 2.
M - 12
DB Access Commands
Move Line
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Move Line command moves a line on a report template.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Line and then Move from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select line appears. 2. Select a line on the report template. The line is dynamically attached to the cursor. The prompt Select placement point appears. 3. Move the line to a new location on the report template. As you move the cursor over the report template, information in the message area changes to reflect the current line, column, table, and field. 4. Click the left mouse button to place the line. DB Access moves the line to the new position. 5. Return to Step 3 to move the line to another position. OR Click the right mouse button to select a different line. Return to Step 2. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command.
Move Redlines (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Move Redlines command places a Move Redlines button, which moves the redlines on the drawing by the user.
Dialog Options
When you select Move Redlines, the Move Redlines dialog appears.
M - 14
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Multiple Column (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Multiple Column command places a field with multiple columns. You can preset the values to be displayed in these fields using the Default/Verify option, or you can use scripts to write runtime data to these fields.
Dialog Options
When you select Multiple Column Field, the Multiple Column dialog appears.
M - 16
DB Access Commands
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Text Font, Color, Editing, Default/Verify, Location, and some scrolling options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of the Text Font, Color, and Location options. Visible rows This field specifies the number of rows displayed simultaneously in the field. Visible columns This field specifies the number of rows displayed simultaneously in the field. Total columns This field limits the total number of columns accessible. Header label This field specifies an additional MCF. This MCF functions as a header and horizontally scrolls in parallel with the original MCF. Column width These radio buttons determine how individual columns are sized for worksheets. They are disabled if the MCF has no database hook. Vertical scroll This check box lets the MCF scroll vertically. Display vertical scrollbar This check box displays the vertical scrollbar. Without it, the MCF can be scrolled with the arrow keys. Vertical scroll notify This check box causes scripts on the MCF to be processed when vertically scrolled. Column scrolling This check box enables column scrolling so that invisible columns can be displayed. Row select buttons This check box determines whether or not row select buttons are available on the MCF. Row select buttons notify DB Access of the row number selected. Entire row selection This check box lets you specify how a tap on a particular cell is interpreted. Single cell selection means that a tap activates only that field, and Entire row selection means that a tap on a cell activates all fields in the row. CR Required This check box lets you set this mode which forces you to press a Carriage Return before input to the MCF is processed. Column info This field allows setting of attributes for individual columns of the MCF. Data type These radio buttons lets you specify the type of data to be entered in the field. Select ASCII, Integer, or Decimal. Justification These radio buttons lets you specify the justification of the data to be entered in the field. Select Left,Center, or Right.
Operating Sequence
M - 18
DB Access Commands
Multi-Column Field (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Multi-Column Field command places a multi-column field on the current dialog, for multi-column text entry/selection/display.
Dialog Options
When you select Multi-Column Field, the Multi-Column Field dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
Multi Gadget (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Multi Gadget command places a button that performs several functions in succession. You can associate up to six commands with the button. The commands must be one of the Place Gadget commands (from Database Utilities, Graphics Utilities, or General Utilities).
M - 20
DB Access Commands
Dialog Options
When you select Multi Gadget, the Multi Gadget dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Place Text/Place Symbol, Text Font, and Location options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options. Blank buttons These buttons let you specify up to six commands to associate with the Multi Gadget button. Commands are processed in order from top to bottom. Add Selecting this button places the dialog in Add mode. You can select a blank button on the dialog, and then select a command to place on the selected button from the Placement pulldown menu. Edit Selecting this button places the dialog in Edit mode. You can select a button that has a command associated with it. The appropriate dialog will display so that you can edit the parameters for the command. Delete Selecting this button places the dialog in Delete mode. You can select a button that has a command associated with it to delete the command.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Placement from the Toolbar menu. Select General and then Multi gadget from the pulldown menus. The Multi Gadget dialog appears. The dialog is in Add mode with the topmost blank button selected. 2. Select command from the Placement pulldown menu. The dialog for the selected command appears. 3. Set the parameters on the dialog. Select OK. The command dialog disappears. The name of the command appears on the selected button. 4. Select the next blank button on the Group Gadget dialog. Return to Step 2 to add another command. OR Select the Edit button and a button to which a command is assigned. The appropriate dialog for the command appears. a. b. Edit any available parameters. Select OK. The command is updated.
OR Select the Delete button and a button to which a command is assigned. The command is deleted. 5. Edit the available parameters on the Group Gadget dialog or accept the default parameters. Select OK to place the button. If you selected Keyin and specified coordinates, the button is automatically placed on the dialog. OR If you selected Data Point, the button is dynamically attached to the screen cursor. The x,y coordinates appear in the message area so you can position the button.
M - 22
DB Access Commands
Tap the left mouse button to specify the upper left corner for the button. Tap the middle mouse button a second time to specify the lower right corner. OR Select Cancel to end the placement.
Multiple Reports (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Multiple Reports command places a Multiple Reports button, which calls the Process Reports dialog. The user can load and process any report templates in the current template library. This function is the same as the Report button in Database Edit.
Dialog Options
When you select Multiple Reports, the Multiple Reports dialog appears.
M - 24
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
DB Access Commands N - 1
New Blank (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The New Blank (Dialog Builder) command loads a blank dialog for a table you select. Default Dialog location and size can be set through the Design Options. A blank template lets you start from scratch, using the commands on the pulldown (placement) menus and the toolbox to design a template with the features and functionality you need.
Operating Sequence
1. Select New Blank (Dialog Builder) from the Dialog Builder menu bar. If you have modified the current dialog, the Save Dialog dialog is called, which lets you write the current dialog template before loading a blank dialog. 2. Use the commands on the pulldown (placement) menus and toolbox to build the dialog. Select Save Dialog (Dialog Builder) to save the dialog to the template library. Do not delete the Cancel button, unless you replace it with another Cancel or Exit button. If you process a dialog that has no Cancel or Exit button, there is no way to dismiss the dialog.
N-2
DB Access Commands
New Blank (Report Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The New Blank (Report Builder) command loads a blank report template for a table you select. Or you can select Unrelated Tables to load a blank template that lets you report on tables that have no relationship. A blank template lets you start from scratch, using the commands on the menu bar to design a template with the features and functionality you need.
Dialog Options
When you select New Blank (Report Builder), the DBA Load Report dialog appears.
Schema This field displays the name of the current schema. Key in a schema name or select a schema using the display list box. Table This field displays the name of the current table. Key in a table name or select a table from the following table list.
Table List Below the Table field is a field listing the available tables. You can select a table from this list. Unrelated Tables This button lets you create a template that reports on tables that have no relationship.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Load Blank from the Report Builder menu bar. If you have modified the current report template, the Save Report dialog is called, which lets you write the current template before loading a blank template. The Select Table dialog appears. 2. Select the table for which you want to generate a blank report template. Select OK. OR Select Unrelated Tables to load a blank report template for unrelated tables. A blank report template is loaded. 3. Use the commands on the menu bar to build the template. Select Save Report to save the report template.
N-4
DB Access Commands
New Default (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The New Default (Dialog Builder) command reads the structure of the attached database and generates a default dialog template for the table you select. A default dialog contains the same function buttons as the Database Edit dialog. You can move, delete, copy and edit existing gadgets, as well as place new gadgets to generate a custom dialog.
Dialog Options
When you select New Default (Dialog Builder), the Select Table dialog appears.
Schema This field displays the name of the current schema. Key in a schema name or select a schema using the display list box. Table This field displays the name of the current table. Key in a table name or select a table from the table list below.
Table List Below the Table field is a field listing the available tables. You can select a table from this list. No Database This button lets you create a menu that can be processed on any table, or that has no database functionality (such as a main menu).
Operating Sequence
1. Select New Default (Dialog Builder) from the Dialog Builder menu bar. If you have modified the current dialog, the Save Dialog dialog is called, which lets you write the current dialog template before loading a default dialog. See the section Save Dialog (Dialog Builder) for information on using this dialog. The Select Table dialog appears. 2. Select or key in the table for which you want to generate a default dialog. Select Exit and Save. OR Select No Database. The specified dialog appears. 3. Use the commands on the menu bar and menu panel to change the dialog. Select Save Dialog (Dialog Builder) to save the dialog to the template library.
N-6
DB Access Commands
New Default (Report Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The New Default (Report Builder) command reads the structure of the attached database and generates a default report template for the table you select. A default report template contains page headers, lines displaying columns for the input data, subtotals and totals for numeric fields, and a sort key. Default reports can provide a quick listing of the database table contents or can provide a starting point for creating customized reports. Default templates do not support unrelated table reports. See the section Blank Reports for information on unrelated table reports.
Dialog Options
When you select New Default (Report Builder), the DBA Load Report dialog appears.
Schema This field displays the name of the current schema. Key in a schema name or select a schema using the display list box.
Table This field displays the name of the current table. Key in a table name or select a table from the following table list. Table List Below the Table field is a field listing the available tables. You can select a table from this list. Select Columns This button calls the DBA Select Columns dialog, which is described in the following section.
Select Columns Menu Options

Table This field displays the name of the current table. To change the table, key in a table name or select a table using the display list box. Column List Below the Table field is a field listing the columns in the current table. You can select columns from this list to be included or excluded from the report template, depending on the Select All Columns/Select No Columns toggle. Select All Columns/Select No Columns This toggle lets you exclude or include selected columns from the report template. Set the toggle to Select All Columns to select columns to be excluded. Set the toggle to Select No Columns to select columns to be included. Columns are ordered across the page in the order you select them.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Load Default from the Report Builder menu bar. If you have modified the current report template, the Save Report dialog is called, which lets you write the current report template before loading a default report template. See the section Save Report for information on using this dialog. The Select Table dialog appears. 2. Select or key in the table for which you want to generate a default report template. Select OK. The specified template appears. OR Select Select Columns to choose which columns are displayed on the template.
N-8
DB Access Commands
The Select Columns dialog appears. Set the Select All Columns/Select No Columns toggle and select the columns to be excluded/included. Select OK. The specified template appears. 3. Process the template as it appears. OR Use the commands on the menu bar to change the report template. There are three ways to display columns that do not fit on the default template: a. Delete unwanted fields, which moves fields over from the right margin. See the section Delete Field. Increase the Columns Per Page of the template. See the section Edit Report Parameters. Use the Place Line and Place Field functions to add lines with additional fields. See the sections Place Line and Place Field.
b.
c.
4.
Select Save Report to save the template to the template library.
Next Row (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Next Row command places a Next Row button, which makes the next row in the universe the current row. Column values for the current row appear in their corresponding column fields on the dialog.
Dialog Options
When you select Next Row, the Next Row dialog appears.
N - 10
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Numeric
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Numeric command lets you place a field that performs a specified calculation for the numeric values in a column. A numeric field can calculate integer or floating point column values. You can specify update and reset conditions, as well as calculate subtotals. Numeric fields used for subtotals and totals are usually placed on body lines and final lines respectively. Numeric fields are not allowed on All Table lines. Join columns let you use a single table report to report on more than one table. Any two database tables that have columns with common values can be joined. See the section Join Columns.
N - 12
DB Access Commands
Dialog Options
When you select Numeric, the Numeric Field dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the menu except for the Print Condition field, which is described in the section Place Field. Calculation This checklist lets you select the type of calculation that will be performed. Total Sums the columns values. Average Averages the columns values. Minimum Prints the minimum value for the column. Maximum Prints the maximum value for the column. Percentage Prints the percentage of the total of the column. Schema This field specifies the schema containing the table for which you want to place a numeric field. You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator to select a new schema. Table This field specifies the table for which you want to place a numeric field. You can key in a new table name or use the list indicator to select a new table. Column This field specifies the column from the current table for which you want to place a numeric field. You can key in a new column name or use the list indicator to select a new column.
Join Columns This button lets you review and edit the join column relationship. The button is inactive until join columns are specified. If you place a numeric field from a table other than the current table on a single table report, you must specify a join column between the primary (that is, the current) table and the secondary table. See the section Join Columns. Length This field specifies the length of the numeric field. Decimal Places This field specifies the number of decimal places for floating point data. Update Condition This field lets you specify a condition which must exist for the field to be incremented. If the Update Condition field is blank, the numeric field is incremented for every row. Reset Condition This field lets you specify a condition which must exist for the field to be reset to zero. If the Reset Condition field is blank, the numeric field is not reset.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Numeric from the Report Builder menu bar. The Numeric Field dialog appears. 2. At the Column field, enter the name of a column from the current table using key-in or the list indicator. Go to Step 5. OR At the Schema or Table field, enter a new schema or table using key-in or the list indicator. The Join Columns dialog appears.
3.
At the Column field for the primary table, enter the name of the join column using key-in or the list indicator. Repeat for the secondary table. Then Specify whether the join is an outer join. Select OK to return to the Numeric Field dialog.
N - 14
DB Access Commands
The Join Columns dialog disappears. The Join Columns button on the Numeric Field dialog is active. 4. At the Column field on the Numeric Field dialog, use key-in or the list indicator to enter the name of the column from the secondary table for which you want to place a field. Set any other parameters as needed. Select OK. The field is dynamically attached to the cursor. The values in the message area can help you position the field on the dialog. DB Access uses F-1, F-2, and so on to represent the first, second, and any subsequent fields on a line. 6. Click the middle mouse button to place the field. The field is inserted before the current field (if any), with one space separating the two fields. Any fields to the right of the new field may shift to the right. You can realign the fields using the following commands: Copy Field Delete Field Undelete Field (Report Builder) Insert Space (Report Builder) Delete Space
5.
OR Select Cancel to end the placement. Once you establish a join column between two tables, you can place additional numeric fields from the secondary table. The Join Columns dialog does not reappear.
DB Access Commands O - 1
Override Key-in (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Override Key-in Mode command calls a panel menu that lets you place buttons to let the user override key-in modes for column fields. For example, if a user selects an Add Query button, any value the user enters in a column field is added as query criteria, regardless of the default key-in mode for the field.
Add Query This button places an Add Query button, which lets a user establish query criteria, column values used to search the database for rows with common information. See the section Add Query (Dialog Builder). Key Column This button places a Key Column button, which lets a user perform a quick search on the database. If a user keys in a value for a column field, DB Access searches the database and retrieves the first row that has the same value for the column. See the Section Key Column (Dialog Builder). Change Row This button places a Change Row button, which lets a user edit column values for a displayed row. See the section Change Row (Dialog Builder). Change All This button places a Change All button, which lets a user change the value of a column for all rows in the current universe. See the section Change All (Dialog Builder). Update Active This button places an Update Active button, which lets a user insert a new row without changing the current row. See the section Update Active (Dialog Builder).
O-2
DB Access Commands
DB Access Commands P - 1
Page
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Page command places a field that prints the report page number. You usually place page fields on a top or bottom line.
Dialog Options
When you select Page, the DBA Page Field dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the menu except for the Print Condition field, which is described in the section Place Field. Length This field lets you specify the length of the page field. Current page/Total pages These radio buttons let you specify the page number to print out in the page field. If you choose Current Page, the current page of your report prints in the page field of each page. If you choose Total Pages, the total number of pages in the report prints in the page field of each page.
P-2
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Pan (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Pan command places a Pan button, which moves a raster image in a window towards the cursor.
Dialog Options
When you select Pan, the Pan dialog appears.
P-4
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Pan (Raster Graphics)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Pan command moves the window area in the direction of the cursor position (top, bottom, left, or right). When you select Pan and place a point in the window, the window area moves toward the cursor by one-third its width or height.
P-6
DB Access Commands
Pick Row (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Pick Row command places a Pick Row field, which displays the current row number. A user can edit the value in a Pick Row field to change the current row.
Dialog Options
When you select Pick Row, the Pick Row dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
P-8
DB Access Commands
Place Fence Block (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Place Fence Block command places a Place Fence Block button, which places a fence used to manipulate linkages.
Dialog Options
When you select Place Fence Block, the Place Fence Block dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
P - 10
DB Access Commands
Place Fence Shape (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Place Fence Shape command places a Place Fence Shape button, which places a multi-sided fence used to manipulate linkages.
Dialog Options
When you select Place Fence Shape, the Place Fence Shape dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
P - 12
DB Access Commands
Place Field (Report Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Place Field command calls a submenu of commands that place fields on a report template. A field must be placed on a line. If you load a blank template, you must place a line before placing any fields.
Text This button places a field that prints a literal text string you assign. Text fields are used to print text that remains the same in a report: titles, column headers, and so forth. See the section Text (Report Builder). Column This button places a field that prints column values from rows in the current universe. You can place column fields from more than one table on a template. See the section Column. Date This button places a field that prints the current date. See the section Date. Time This button places a field that prints the current time. See the section Time. Page This button places a field that prints the current page number for the report. See the section Page. Counter This button places a field that keeps track of how many rows from the input universe have processed. See the section Counter. Numeric This button places a field that calculates a running total for a numeric column value. See the section Numeric. Derived This button places a field that prints the results of calculations or the contents of a variable that has been assigned in a script or user action statement. See the section Derived.
Print Condition Option

All Place Field dialogs have a Print Condition field, which lets you specify a condition which must exist for the field to print. If the Print Condition field is blank, the associated report template field always prints.
Standard Operating Sequence

The following sequence is common to most of the Place Field commands. Any exceptions are discussed in the individual command descriptions. 1. Select Place Field from the Report Builder menu bar. The Place Field dialog appears. 2. Select the button for the type of field you want to place. The dialog for the specified field appears. 3. Edit the available parameters or accept the default parameters. Select OK. The field is dynamically attached to the cursor. The values in the message area can help you position the field on the dialog. DB Access uses F-1, F-2, and so on to represent the first, second, and any subsequent fields on a line. 4. Click the middle mouse button to place the field. The field is inserted before the current field (if any), with one space separating the two fields. Any fields to the right of the new field may shift to the right. You can realign the fields using the following commands: Copy Field Delete Field Undelete Field (Report Builder) Insert Space (Report Builder) Delete Space
OR Select Cancel to end the placement.
P - 14
DB Access Commands
Place Gadget (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) commands let you place DB Access gadgets onto custom dialogs. Dialog gadgets provide the runtime user with access to and control of application databases. They can also access MicroStation and CLIX commands. When you select Place Gadget (Dialog Builder), a panel menu appears displaying command group buttons for the four general categories of gadgets: Database Utilities, Graphic Utilities, General Utilities, and Cosmetic Graphics. Gadgets in the first three command groups perform particular operations, while Cosmetic Graphics effect only the appearance of a dialog.
Database Utilities This button calls a panel menu that lets you place gadgets to query and edit the database, and to perform other database manipulations. See the section Database Utilities (Dialog Builder). General Utilities This button calls a panel menu that lets you place gadgets that perform general functions such as executing a CLIX command or exiting a dialog. See the section General Utilities (Dialog Builder).
Common
Before Script This script is invoked before the Built-In function (if any). Built-In The function DBA automatically invokes when the gadget receives input. Option for the built-in function can be specified (when available) by selecting the options button. After Script This script is invoked after the Built-In function (if any). Help Topic This field specifies the gadgets help topic, which can be passed to dba_help(). Gadget Label This field is the gadget label, which can be passed to DBA and FI functions. Options Allows selection of built-in parameters. Choose Font Lets the user select font, font style, and font size for the gadget. Choose Color Lets the user select color for the gadget. Windows preference color must be OFF; otherwise, Control Panel - Color determines the color for the gadget. Invisible This check box determines whether the gadget is initially displayed. Disabled This check box determines whether the gadget is initially active (selectable). Windows preference color This check box determines whether the gadget is color is specified by Control Panel - Color, or the I/Forms color is used. Initial notify This check box determines whether the dialogs initial notify routine is called when the cursor is positioned in a field gadget. Completion notify This check box determines whether the dialogs completion notify routine is called when input is made to the gadget.
P - 16
DB Access Commands
Single Column
1.
Database Hook This check box determines whether database values can be displayed from the gadget. Schema This field specifies the schema containing the table for which you want to connect a database hook. You can key in the schema name or use the list indicator to select a schema. Table This field specifies the table for which you want to connect a database hook. You can key in the table name or use the list indicator to select a table. Column This field specifies the column from the current table for which you want to place a database hook. You can key in the column name or use the list indicator to select a column. Default Mode These radio buttons are used to select the CR mode for the gadget. Write Access This check box permits write access to the column that you are hooking the gadget to. Multiple Column database dialog, available from worksheet.
2.
3.
4.
5. 6.
Choose Font
P - 18
DB Access Commands
Choose Color
Off Color/On Color This toggle lets you select colors for shadowed text. Off Color is the color used for the shadow. On Color is the color used for the text. For normal text, the Off Color is used for the text.
Button Palette These buttons display the default colors available. Select a button to select the color. Specify color This field lets you key in any color slot supported by your workstation.
Field Options Subdialog Scrolling Options Dialog

When you select Scrolling on the User Field dialog, the Scrolling Options dialog appears.
Scrolling Mode This checklist lets you specify the scrolling mode available to the user. Vertical scrolling This checklist box creates a field with vertical scrolling. You can optionally display a vertical scroll bar. When Vertical scrolling is selected, the Display vertical scrollbar - NO/Display vertical scrollbar - YES and Vertical scrollbar notify - NO/Vertical scrollbar notify - YES toggles are active. Horizontal scrolling This checklist box creates a field with horizontal scrolling. You can optionally display a horizontal scroll bar. When Horizontal scrolling is selected, the Display horizontal scrollbar - NO/Display horizontal scrollbar YES toggle is active. Display horizontal scrollbar - NO/Display horizontal scrollbar - YES This toggle specifies whether a horizontal scroll bar appears on the field. This toggle is active whenever horizontal scrolling is selected. Display vertical scrollbar - NO/Display vertical scrollbar - YES This toggle specifies whether a vertical scroll bar appears on the field. This toggle is active whenever vertical scrolling is selected. Vertical scrollbar notify - NO/Vertical scrollbar notify - YES This check box lets you specify whether DBA is notified when the user selects the vertical scroll bar. Wrap text - NO/Wrap text - YES This toggle specifies whether input is limited to the length of the field. If you select Wrap text - NO, input terminates at the end of the field. If you select Wrap text - YES, input wraps to the next row when it reaches the end of the field. Horizontal scrolling does not permit text wrapping.
P - 20
DB Access Commands
Default/Verify Options Dialog

When you select Defaults/Verify on the User Field dialog, the Default/Verify Options dialog appears.
Verify against list - NO/Verify against list - YES This toggle specifies whether a value entered in the gadget must match a value in the drop down list. If you select Verify against list - YES, input that does not match a value in the list is rejected. This check box is inactive if the field has no list. Minimum value This field specifies the minimum numeric value that can be entered in the gadget. This field is active for integer or floating point data only. Maximum value This field specifies the maximum numeric value that can be entered in the gadget. This field is active for integer or floating point data only. Format string This field specifies the format for numeric data input. This field is active for integer or floating point data only. Standard C format strings must be used (%d, %f, etc.). Default field values This field lets you key in default initial values for the gadget.
Standard Operating Sequence

The following sequence is common to most of the Place Gadget commands. Any exceptions are discussed in the individual command descriptions. 1. 2. Select Placement from the Toolbar menu. Select the command group (Database Utilities, Graphic Utilities, or General Utilities, for the gadget you want to place.
If the gadget is not part of a command sub-group, go to Step 4. 3. Select the command sub-group for the gadget you want to place. The specified panel menu appears. 4. Select the button for the gadget you want to place. The dialog for the specified gadget appears. 5. Edit the available parameters or accept the default parameters. Select OK to place the gadget. If you selected Keyin and specified coordinates, the gadget is automatically placed on the dialog. OR If you selected Data Point, the gadget is dynamically attached to the screen cursor. The x,y coordinates appear in the message area so you can position the gadget. Click the left mouse button to specify the upper left corner for the gadget. If required, tap the left mouse button a second time to specify the lower right corner. OR Select Cancel to abort the placement.
P - 22
DB Access Commands
Place Line
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Place Line command calls the Edit Line menu, which lets you place blank report lines. You must place lines on a report template before placing fields.
Dialog Options
When you select Place Line, the DBA Edit Line dialog appears.
Single table/All tables These radio buttons specify whether the line is processed against a specific (single) table or against all tables in the attached database. Select All tables for common lines (such as page headings) in an unrelated tables report. Select Single table for all other report lines. You cannot place column or numeric fields on All table lines.
Schema This field specifies the schema which contains the table associated with the line. You can key in a new schema name or use the list indicator to select a new schema. This field is labeled Structure for userdata and ASCII reports. Table This field specifies the table associated with the line. You can key in a new table name or use the list indicator to select a new table. The Schema and Table fields are active only if the Single table setting is selected. Line Type This checklist specifies the current line type. Preface These lines print once at the beginning of a report. After all preface lines are printed, the report continues on a new page. You can use preface lines to print a cover sheet, title page, or legend. Top These lines print once at the top of every page. Page headings, column headings, date, time, and page number are included in the top lines of default reports created with the Load Default command. Body These lines print once for every row in the input universe. They usually contain column fields. Bottom These lines print once at the bottom of every page. Page numbers or footnotes can be printed with bottom lines. Final These lines print once at the end of the report. You can use final lines to print report summaries or report totals. Blank Lines Before This field specifies the number of blank lines that print before the line. Blank Lines After This field specifies the number of blank lines that print after the line. Print Condition This field lets you specify a condition which must exist for the line to print. If Print Condition is blank, the line is always printed.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Placement from the Toolbar menu and then select Line from the pulldown menu. The Edit Line dialog appears. 2. Edit the available parameters or accept the default parameters. Select OK.
P - 24
DB Access Commands
The line is dynamically attached to the cursor. The values in the message area can help you position the blank line on the template. 3. Click the left mouse button to place the line. The line is inserted before the current line (if any). OR Select Cancel to end the placement.
Plot Window (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Plot Window command places a Plot Window button, which plots the specified raster image.
Dialog Options
When you select Plot Window, the Plot Window dialog appears.
P - 26
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Plot Window (Raster Graphics)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Plot Window command creates a Type 2 (straight byte) file for the specified window and plots it using the command string specified in the DBA_PLOT environment variable.

You must define and export DBA_PLOT. The image to be plotted must be displayed. For more information, see these sections Load File (Raster Graphics) and DM/DB Access Environment Variables.
P - 28
DB Access Commands
Previous Row (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Previous Row command places a Previous Row button, which makes the previous row in the universe the current row. Column values for the current row appear in their corresponding column fields on the dialog.
Dialog Options
When you select Previous Row, the Previous Row dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
P - 30
DB Access Commands
Process Dialog
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Process Dialog command processes dialogs created in the DB Access Dialog Builder. This processing lets you test gadgets on the current dialog to see if they are working properly. You can also process the current dialog from the Execute palette of the DB Access main menu bar or from the Dialog Builder toolbar.
From Dialog Builder
Selecting the Process Dialog button processes the current dialog.
Process Query (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Process Query command returns all rows in the current table that meet the query criteria. The set of rows that meets the query criteria is called a universe of rows. If no query criteria exist, the universe contains all rows for the current table. If you place a fence in a design file, Process Query returns all rows with database linkages to the elements within the fence.
P - 32
DB Access Commands
Process Query (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Process Query command places a Process Query button, which queries all rows of the current table that meet the current query criteria. If no query criteria exists, it queries all rows in the current table.
Dialog Options
When you select Process Query, the Process Query dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
P - 34
DB Access Commands
Process Report
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Process Report command processes templates created in the Report Builder. You can send report output to a file or review it on the screen. To generate the input universe of rows for the report, you can use an SQL select statement or a saved query criteria. Or the universe can be all rows with database linkages to elements within a fenced area in a design file. You can access the Process Report command from the menu bar, from Database Edit, or from the Report Builder menu bar. The Process button calls the Process Reports dialog. Output File This field specifies the output filename for the report generated when you process the report template. If you do not specify a full pathname for the file, it is written to your working directory (from which you invoked DB Access). If the output filename is stdout, no file is created. The report output is sent to the DB Access standard output device which, by default, is the invoking window. Element List/Input File This field specifies an element list or input file to use as input to a report template. Load Report This button calls the Load From Library dialog, which lets you load a report template from a specified template library. For more information, see the section Load From Library. Edit Query This button calls the Edit Query dialog, which lets you load a query criteria template. The query criteria is used to generate an input universe of rows for the report. For unrelated table reports, you can load a query criteria template for each table. You can also edit the current query criteria. For more information, see the section Edit Query (Database Edit). Process This button processes the input universe of rows against the current report template to generate the report to the specified output file. List Output This button calls a report output dialog, which is described in the following section, Report Output Dialog Options. Report Tables The fields just below the Element List/Input File field list the tables that the current report template reports on. If the report is an unrelated tables report, more than one table is listed. You can control the input universe for each table independently. A single table report template lists only one (primary) table. Processing Options This field lets you select the method for generating the input universe for the report.
All This option includes all rows for the specified table as input for the report template. Query This option includes rows that meet the specified query criteria to generate the input universe for the report template. This option also determines if the fence contents in a design file are to be used as the query criteria. Use the MicroStation Place Fence command to place a fence around the elements that you want to report on. The database rows with linkages to the fenced elements will serve as input to the report. If you load a query criteria template but do not select Query, the query criteria is not used. Element List/Input File This option uses an element list/ASCII file as input to a user data/ASCII structure template. You must identify the file in the Element List/Input File field. Exclude This option excludes the table as input to the report template. Select this option only with unrelated table reports when you want to report on some, but not all, of the tables.
Report Output Dialog Options

When you select List Output, a report output dialog appears.
Report Listing This field displays the report.
P - 36
DB Access Commands
Read More This button displays the next page of a multipage report. Read To EOF This button scrolls to the end of the report. Text Size This button calls the Text Size dialog, which lets you change the size of the text display on the report output dialog. Use the slider to change the text size. Print This button displays the standard print dialog, so that report output can be printed. DM/DB Access Environment Variables
From Database Edit

When you select Report, the Process Reports dialog appears. The dialog is described in the previous section, From the Main Dialog.
From Report Builder

When you select Process Report from the menu bar, the report output dialog for the current report template appears. See the section Report Output Dialog Options for a description of the dialog.
DB Access Commands Q - 1
Query (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Query command calls a panel menu containing commands for placing Query function buttons on the current dialog.
Process Query This button places a Process Query button, which queries all rows of the current table that meet the Query Criteria. If no Query Criteria exists, it queries all rows in the current table. See the section Process Query (Dialog Builder). Edit Query This button places an Edit Query button, which displays the Edit Query screen. From the Edit Query screen you can view, edit, and save the current query criteria, or load a query criteria from the attached template library. See the section Edit Query (Dialog Builder). Initialize Query This button places an Initialize Query button, which initializes (clears) the current query criteria. See the section Initialize Query (Dialog Builder). AND/OR Toggle This button places an AND/OR toggle, which lets you select a logical AND or OR operation when establishing query criteria with Add Query. See the section AND/OR Toggle (Dialog Builder). Relational Operator This button places a Relational Operator field, which lets you search for ranges of column values such as greater than and less than when establishing query criteria with Add Query. See the section Relational Operator (Dialog Builder). Set Query This button places a Set Query button, which lets you initialize the query criteria, load a saved query template, and process the query criteria in one step. See the section Set Query (Dialog Builder).
Q-2
DB Access Commands
Add Query This button places an Add Query button, which lets you establish query criteria, column values used to search the database for rows with common information. See the section Add Query (Dialog Builder).
Quit (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Quit command places a Quit button, which dismisses the specified raster graphics window.
Dialog Options
When you select Quit, the Quit dialog appears.
Q-4
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Quit (Raster Graphics)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Quit command dismisses the selected window. To use this command, select Quit and a window.
Q-6
DB Access Commands
DB Access Commands R - 1
Radio Button (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Radio Button command places a radio button. You can use scripts to define the function or read the value of the radio button.
Dialog Options
When you select Radio Button, the Radio Button dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Place Text/Place Symbol, Text Font, Color, and Location options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options. Unselected/Selected This check box specifies the default value for the gadget. Radio Group This field specifies a label number for a group of radio buttons that you place. Assigning a group label number lets you treat the checklist as a single gadget, with only one box selectable at a time. Each box also has an individual label number. If Group Label is non-zero, Radio buttons are placed instead of checklists.
R-2
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Raster View (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Raster View gadgets are placed on dialogs so that runtime users can load and manipulate supported raster files and text files. The Raster View command calls the following panel menu:
Load File This button places a Load File button, which displays the specified raster file. For more information, see the section Load File (Dialog Builder). Plot Window This button places a Plot Window button, which plots the specified display. For more information, see the section Plot Window (Dialog Builder). Quit This button places a Quit button that dismisses the specified graphics window. For more information, see the section Quit (Dialog Builder). Fit This button places a Fit button, which displays an entire document in the specified window. For more information, see the section Fit View (Dialog Builder). Measure This button places a Measure button, which determines the distance between two points in a raster image. For more information, see the section Measure (Dialog Builder). Pan This button places a Pan button, which moves the window area toward the cursor. For more information, see the section Pan (Dialog Builder). Rotate This button places a Rotate button, which moves the raster image in the window area in a counter-clockwise direction. For more information, see the section Rotate (Dialog Builder).
R-4
DB Access Commands
Update View This button places an Update View button, which refreshes the specified window. For more information, see the section Update View (Dialog Builder). Window Area This button places a Window Area button, which displays the area specified by two points. For more information, see the section Window Area (Dialog Builder). Window Center This button places a Window Center button, which brings the selected point in a raster image to the center of the window. For more information, see the section Window Center (Dialog Builder). Window Scroll This button places a Window Scroll button, which moves the window area from one specified point to another. For more information, see the section Window Scroll (Dialog Builder). Zoom In This button places a Zoom In button, which displays half as much of the specified file at twice the resolution. For more information, see the section Zoom In (Dialog Builder). Zoom Out This button places a Zoom Out button, which displays twice as much of the specified file at half the resolution. For more information, see the section Zoom Out (Dialog Builder).
Rectangle (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Rectangle command lets you place a rectangle on the current dialog. You can select line style, and weight. Rectangles are useful for grouping related gadgets together.
Dialog Options
When you select Rectangle, the Rectangle dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Location and Color options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for descriptions of these options. Select Line Weight This button calls a dialog that lets you specify a line weight for the rectangle you are placing. Use the slider on the dialog to select an active line weight. Select Line Style This button calls a dialog that lets you specify a line style for the rectangle you are placing. Select the checklist box next to the style you want to use.
Operating Sequence
R-6
DB Access Commands
Relational Operator (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Relational Operator command places a Relational Operator field, which lets you search for ranges of column values such as greater than and less than when establishing query criteria with Add Query. You can key in a new value or select the list indicator in the Field Options subdialog to select from the available relational operators. At runtime, comments are appended to the relational operator using the List option from the Dialog Builder. Place comments after a semicolon in the predefined list values field. For an example of predefined list values, edit the Relational Operator field on a default dialog.
Dialog Options
When you select Relational Operator, the Relational Operator dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Text Font, Color, and Location options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options. Rows This field lets you specify the number of rows that appear simultaneously in the associated list field for the Relational Operator field. Length This field lets you specify the length for the field. Field Options This subdialog lets you call other dialogs to set further parameters. Select from Scrolling, and Defaults/Verify. The respective dialogs are described in the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder).
Operating Sequence
R-8
DB Access Commands
Remove Fence (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Remove Fence button removes linkages attached to graphic elements within a fence you place.
Delete Row
When you remove a database linkage from a graphic element, the value of the Delete Row toggle determines whether the database rows linked to the graphic elements are deleted also. If Delete Row is toggled to On, the rows linked to the element are deleted when the linkages are removed. Off specifies that only the linkages are removed.

Load a design or raster file. For files with database linkages, set the Delete Row toggle to the appropriate value. Place a fence around the elements for which you want to remove linkages. Vector graphics: Use the MicroStation Place Fence command. Raster graphics: Use the Place Fence or Place Fence Multi command. You can place these commands with the Dialog Builder or you can call the script functions dba_raster_fence or dba_raster_fence_multi.

1. Select Remove Fence from the Database Edit dialog. The prompt Accept/reject fence contents appears. 2. Click the left mouse button anywhere on the image to accept the elements in the fence you have specified. The message Processing fence contents appears, followed by Linkages removed. If Delete Row is set to On, a warning screen appears, asking you to verify the deletion of rows along with the linkages. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the fence and exit the command.
3.
Select Yes to delete all linkages and corresponding database rows for the graphic elements in the fence. The message Linkage(s) removed appears. DB Access exits the command. OR Select No to cancel the remove linkages processing. DB Access exits the command.

1. Select Remove Fence from the Database Edit dialog. The linkages within the fence highlight and the prompt Accept/reject fence appears. 2. Click the left mouse button in the window to remove the linkages. DB Access removes the displayed linkages and exits the command. OR If no linkages exist within the fence, the message No linkages found appears. DB Access exits the command. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the fence and exit the command.
R - 10
DB Access Commands
Remove Fence (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Remove Fence command places a Remove Fence button, which removes the linkages on any graphic elements contained within a fence defined by the user. For more information, see the section Remove Fence (Database Edit)
Dialog Options
When you select Remove Fence, the Remove Fence dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
R - 12
DB Access Commands
Remove Linkage (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Remove Linkage button lets you remove linkages attached to a graphic element.
Delete Row
When you remove a database linkage from a graphic element, the value of the Delete Row toggle determines whether the database rows linked to the graphic elements are deleted also. If Delete Row is toggled to On, the rows linked to the element are deleted when the linkages are removed. Off specifies that only the linkages are removed.

Load a design or raster file. For files with database linkages, set the Delete Row toggle to the appropriate value.

1. Select Remove Linkage from the Database Edit dialog. The prompt Identify element/reset to exit appears. 2. Position the cursor on the graphic element for which you want to remove the database linkage(s). Tap the left mouse button. The element highlights, and the prompt Accept/reject element appears. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. 3. Click the left mouse button anywhere on the image to accept the element. The type of linkage (Read or Read/Write), the table name, and the entity (table) number and mslink value for the first linkage on the element appear in the following format: R/W <tablename> (E#, mslink = n) where # equals the table number (the value for the table in the entitynum column of the mscatalog table) and n equals the mslink value for the database row. The message Accept/reject linkage appears. OR
If there are no linkages attached to the selected element, the message No linkage present appears. Return to Step 2. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the highlighted element. Return to Step 2. 4. Click the left mouse button anywhere on the image to accept the displayed linkage. The message Linkage removed appears. If Delete Row is set to On, the corresponding row in the database is deleted. The prompt Identify element/reset to exit reappears. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the displayed linkage. Information for the next linkage on the element appears. Repeat Step 3. OR If no more linkages are attached, the message No linkage present appears. The prompt Identify element/reset to exit reappears. 5. Return to Step 2 to remove more database linkages for graphic elements. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command.

1. 2. Select Remove Linkage from the Database Edit dialog. Position the cursor on the graphic element for which you want to remove the linkages. Click the left mouse button. The element highlights, and the following prompt appears: Accept/Reject,<type> linkage (for note or file linkage) Accept/Reject, Entity Number = #, Mslink = n (for database linkage) where # equals the table number (the value for the table in the entitynum column of the mscatalog table) and n equals the mslink value for the database row. OR
R - 14
DB Access Commands
If there are no linkages attached to the selected element, the message No linkage present appears. DB Access exits the command. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command. 3. Click the middle mouse button in the window to accept (remove) the displayed linkage. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the displayed linkage. The element highlights, indicating another linkage. You are prompted to accept/reject the linkage. Repeat Step 3. OR If no more linkages are attached, the message No more linkages appears.
Remove Linkage (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Remove Linkage command places a Remove Linkage button, which removes the linkages on any graphic elements selected by the user. For more information, see the section Remove Linkage (Database Edit).
Dialog Options
When you select Remove Linkage, the Remove Linkage dialog appears.
R - 16
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Report (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Report command calls the Process Reports dialog, which lets you load and process a report template. For more information, see the section Process Report.
R - 18
DB Access Commands
Report (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Report command calls a menu panel containing commands for placing Report function buttons on a dialog.
Multiple Reports This button places a Multiple Reports button, which calls the Process Reports dialog. The user can load and process any report templates in the current template library. See the section Multiple Reports (Dialog Builder). Review This button places a Review button, which generates a quick review of the current universe of rows to an output screen. See the section Review (Dialog Builder). Single Report This button places a Report button, which is linked to a report template in the current template library (and optionally to a query criteria template). When you selects Report, the report template is processed against the current universe of rows (or the universe generated by the specified query criteria). The report output is written to the screen. See the section Single Report (Dialog Builder).
Restore Defaults (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Restore Defaults command restore the database edit screen to its original state.
R - 20
DB Access Commands
Restore Defaults (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Restore Defaults command places a Restore Defaults button, which restores the default values of the columns displayed by any column field.
Dialog Options
When you select Restore Defaults, the Restore Defaults dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
R - 22
DB Access Commands
Review (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Review command generates a formatted column-by-column listing of the current universe (defined by the current query criteria). The review lists each column that is toggled on (see the section Fields On/Off (Database Edit)). The review also totals numeric columns.
Dialog Options
When you select Review, a Universe Review dialog appears.
Universe Listing This worksheet displays multiple columns and rows from the current universe. Worksheet headers list the names of on columns. Filename This field specifies the name of a file to which the universe review can be written. Line Length This field specifies the number of characters in a line in the output file. Page Length This field specifies the number of lines in a page in the output file. Write File This button writes the universe review to the file specified.
Print File This button prints the universe review. This button invokes the Print dialog, which sends the review to a print device. Read More This button displays the next page of a multipage review. Read To EOF This button scrolls to the end of the universe review.
R - 24
DB Access Commands
Review (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Review command places a Review button, which sends a formatted column-by-column listing of the current universe of rows to the screen. Only those columns toggled ON are included in the review.
Dialog Options
When you select Review, the Review dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
R - 26
DB Access Commands
Review Element (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Review Element command reviews linkages for a graphic element in a design or raster file. When you select Review Element and identify a graphic element for which a linkage exists, DB Access responds differently according to the linkage type. Linkage Database Notes Response The associated row becomes the current universe. The Attach/Review Notes dialog appears, displaying the associated text file. Raster graphics only. Displays the associated raster element. Raster graphics only. If the file linkage is to an element in the same file, and only one window currently displays the file, DB Access highlights and zooms in on the associated element in that window. If two or more windows display the file, the highlighted element is displayed in another window. If the linkage is to an element in another file, and that file is currently displayed, DB Access highlights and zooms in on the associated element in that window. If the file is not currently displayed, DB Access loads the file and displays the highlighted element. The display of file linkages can be controlled with the global variables dba_fl_mode, dba_fl_zoom, and dba_fl_blink. For more information, see the section DB Access Global Variables.
File

You must have a design or raster file loaded. The graphic elements in the file must have linkages.

1. 2. Select Review Element from the Database Edit dialog. At the prompt, Identify element/reset to exit, place the cursor on the graphic element for which you want to review the database linkages. Click the left mouse button. The element highlights, and the prompt Accept/reject element appears. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command.
3.
Click the left mouse button anywhere on the image to accept the highlighted graphic element. The type of linkage (Read or Read/Write), the table name, and the entity (table) number and mslink value for the first linkage on the element appear in the following format: R/W <tablename> (E#, mslink = n) where # equals the table number (the value for the table in the entitynum column of the mscatalog table) and n equals the mslink value for the database row. The message Accept/reject linkage appears. OR If there are no linkages attached to the selected element, the message No linkage present appears. Return to Step 2. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the highlighted element. Return to Step 2.
4.
Click the left mouse button anywhere on the image to accept the displayed linkage. The row with the mslink value equal to the displayed value for the linkage appears in the Database Edit dialog. The universe now consists of the accepted row. The prompt Identify element/reset to exit reappears. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the displayed linkage. Information for the next linkage on the element appears. Repeat Step 4. OR If no more linkages are present, the message No linkage present appears.
5.
Return to Step 2 to review more database linkages for graphic elements. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command.
R - 28
DB Access Commands

1. 2. Select Review Element from the Database Edit dialog. Place the cursor on the graphic element for which you want to review the linkages. Tap the left mouse button. The element highlights, and the following prompt appears: Accept/Reject, <type> linkage (for note or file linkage) Accept/Reject, Entity Number = #, Mslink = n (for database linkage) where # equals the table number (the value for the table in the entitynum column of the mscatalog table) and n equals the mslink value for the database row. OR If there are no linkages attached to the selected element, the message No linkage present appears. 3. Tap the left mouse button in the window to accept the displayed linkage. DB Access responds according to the linkage type. See the preceding table. OR Click the right mouse button to reject the displayed linkage. The element highlights, indicating another linkage. You are prompted to accept/reject the linkage. Repeat Step 3. OR If no more linkages are present, the message No more linkages appears.
Review Element (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Review Element command places a Review Element button, which reviews linkages for a graphic element in a design or raster file. For more information, see the section Review Element (Database Edit).
Dialog Options
When you select Review Element, the Review Element dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Place Text/Place Symbol, Text Font, Color, and Location options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options.
R - 30
DB Access Commands
Verify Element/Dont Verify Element This toggle determines whether Review Element searches for more than one element in a specified area. When the toggle is set to Verify Element, DB Access finds multiple linkages if they exist.
Operating Sequence
Review Sequence (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Review Sequence command displays existing sequences on the current dialog as dotted yellow arrows between the sequenced gadgets.
R - 32
DB Access Commands
RIS Schema Manager
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The RIS Schema Manager dialog displays a three-column table listing all the schemas known to RIS, each schema type, and the schemas associated dictionary. Buttons corresponding to the actions of the Schema Manager are also on the form. When you select a button, you initiate that particular action, and the associated subform is displayed. When you select one of the schemas from the list on the RIS Schema Manager dialog, information about that schema is displayed on the subform.
Operating Sequence
1. Activate the RIS Schema Manager by keying in: c:\win32app\ingr\share\ris05.00\bin\rismgr The RIS Schema Manager dialog is displayed.
2.
Select the button from the RIS Schema Manager dialog for the function you want to use. The RIS Schema Manager functions are described briefly in the following list. See the section listed for a complete description. Button Name Schema Definition Function Provides additional functions and dialog for schema definition. See the section Schema Definition. Provides additional functions and dialogs that manipulate tables, views, and indexes. See the section Data Definition. Lets you review and manipulate schema files. See the section Schema File. Lets you review and specify the location of a RIS client process. See the section Locate Client. Lets you set mode ANSI on or off and enable different databases. See the section Set.
Data Definition
Schema File
Locate Client
Set
3.
Select the Restore button to erase the secondary dialogs. The RIS Schema Manager rereads the RIS schemas file. OR Select the Close button to terminate the RIS Schema Manager.
R - 34
DB Access Commands
Schema Definition
The Schema Definition dialog lets you initiate functions to display schema information, create and drop schemas, access secure schemas and dictionaries, and modify schema passwords, node information, and DB2 passwords.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Schema Definition button from the RIS Schema Manager dialog.
The Schema Definition dialog appears. The dialog has eight buttons that let you initiate a particular action. 2. Select the button from the Schema Definition dialog for the function you want to use. The Schema Definition functions are described briefly in the following list. See the section for a complete description. Button Name Schema Information Function Displays information about a specified schema. See the section Schema Information. Lets you create schemas. See the section Create Schema. Lets you drop schemas. See the section Drop Schema. Grants and revokes access to a secure schema. See the section Secure Schema Access. Grants and revokes dictionary access to a schema. See the section Dictionary Access. Lets you modify the schema password. See the section Modify Schema Password Form. Lets you modify node information. See the section Modify Node Information.
Create Schema Drop Schema Secure Schema Access
Dictionary Access
Modify Schema Password
Modify Node Information
Modify DB2 Password
Lets you modify the DB2 password. See the section Modify DB2 Password.
3.
Select the Restore button to erase the secondary dialogs. OR Select the Close button to exit the Schema Definition dialog.
R - 36
DB Access Commands
Schema Information
The Schema Information dialog displays information about a specified schema. You can key in a schema name or select a name from the schema list on the RIS Schema Manager dialog. This dialog only displays information; it is not editable.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Schema Information button from the Schema Definition dialog.
The Schema Information dialog appears and displays information about the active schema (if one has been selected from the RIS Schema Manager dialog). 2. Key in the schema name in the Schema Name field on the Schema Information dialog or select a schema from the schema list on the RIS Schema Manager dialog if the schema you want is not already the active schema. The information is displayed. 3. Select the Restore button to clear the dialog. OR Select the Close button to exit the Schema Information dialog.
Create Schema
The Create Schema dialog creates new RIS schemas and corresponds directly to the RIS create schema statement. The database-specific information on the Create Schema dialog can be entered in three ways: 1. By keying in the information directly. If the schema is being created on a database unknown to RIS, this is the only alternative. By selecting an existing schema from the RIS Schema Manager dialog. The database-specific information about that schema is entered into the Create Schema form. This method is particularly convenient when creating additional schemas on a database. By selecting the Display Databases button. A dialog listing all the known RIS databases is displayed. Selecting one of these databases enters information about that database into the Create Schema dialog.
2.
3.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Create Schema button from the Schema Definition dialog.
The Create Schema dialog is displayed. The Create Schema dialog has two areas: The DBMS-independent area. The DBMS-dependent area. 2. Key in the appropriate values for the DBMS-independent section of the dialog. The following list explains the DBMS-independent fields:
R - 38
DB Access Commands
a.
Schema Name Specifies the schema name. Select the field and key in a schema name. Password Optionally, select the Password field to specify a password for the schema. The No Echo/Echo toggle causes the password to not display (No Echo) or display (Echo) when it is keyed in. Schema Type Toggles between Standard and Secure schemas. Network Protocol Specifies the type of network protocol to use to communicate with the remote site. Only the top (#1) protocol is used in the Create Schema statement. When you select a protocol, it moves to the bottom (#4). (ISO is not currently supported.) To change the order of the Network Protocol fields, select one Network Protocol field and its value is replaced with the value of the Network Protocol field below it. The value that was originally selected is moved to the bottom of the list.
b.
c. d.
e.
Nodename or Address Specifies a nodename, an Ethernet address (specified in the form [lan.]address), an Internet address, or an address appropriate for the protocol. Get Client Address Fills the Nodename or Address fields with the addresses of the client machines. Database Username Specifies the database username. Password Lets you specify a password for the database username. The No Echo/Echo toggle causes the password to not display (No Echo) or display (Echo) when it is keyed in. Include Database Users Tables/Views Toggles between Yes to include the database users tables and views, or No. OS Type Specifies the operating system type on which the server is running. For example, UNIX, VMS, or Windows NT. Use Existing Dictionary Toggles between No (the default) and Yes. You must already have permission from the dictionary owner to use an existing dictionary. Dictionary Owner Specifies a user who owns a dictionary in the particular database.
f.
g. h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
3.
Database Type Displays a list of the database types. If the selected database type requires additional information, fields to key in that information will be displayed when you select the database type. Select the list indicator on the right side of the Database Type field.
4.
A list of the DBMSs supported by RIS is displayed.
The supported RDBMSs are: INFORMIX ORACLE INGRES DB2 RDB SYBASE OS400 5. Select a database type from the list. Various fields specific to the DBMS are displayed. The DBMS-dependent fields for each database type are explained in separate subsections following this section. 6. To display databases known to RIS, select the Display Databases button.
R - 40
DB Access Commands
The RIS Databases dialog is displayed. Databases known to RIS are listed on this dialog. If you select a database from the RIS Databases dialog, information about that database is placed in the Create Schema dialog. Fields specific to each type of database are displayed on the Create Schema form. 7. Go to the section specific to the type of database you are creating for instructions on filling in the DBMS-dependent fields.
For more information, see these sections: Create Schema (DB2) Create Schema (INFORMIX) Create Schema (INGRES) Create Schema (ORACLE) Create Schema (RDB) Create Schema (SYBASE) Create Schema (OS400)
Create Schema (INFORMIX)

When you select the INFORMIX DBMS from the Create Schema dialog, the INFORMIXdependent fields appear on the dialog.
Operating Sequence
1. Key in the appropriate values for the INFORMIX-dependent dialog. The following list explains these fields: Database Name Specifies the INFORMIX database name accessible to the schema. Database Management System Location Specifies the path where the INFORMIX RDBMS is installed. SQLEXEC Specifies whether the INFORMIX OnLine or INFORMIX Standard Engine is being used. Needs to be set if both the Standard Engine and Online exist on the machine. Otherwise INFORMIX defaults to on-line. Where $INFORMIXDIR is the location of the INFORMIX Database Management System, if using INFORMIX OnLine, specify $INFORMIXDIR/lib/sqlturbo; if using the INFORMIX Standard Engine, specify $INFORMIXDIR/lib/sqlexec. DBTEMP Specifies where INFORMIX will create temporary files. TBCONFIG Specifies the location of the TBCONFIG file used by INFORMIX OnLine. (This file permits INFORMIX OnLine to be configured so that a large number of tables can be used with joins. Also, table structures and limits can be varied with this file. Refer to your INFORMIX documentation for more information on the TBCONFIG file.) 2. When complete, select the Run button to execute the dialog and create the schema. OR Select the Restore button to clear all the fields on the dialog. OR
R - 42
DB Access Commands
Select the Force button to drop previously created RIS dictionary objects (such as RIS tables, views, indexes, and schema privileges) before creating the new schema. OR Select the Close button to exit the dialog without creating a schema.
Create Schema (ORACLE)

When you select the ORACLE DBMS on the Create Schema dialog, the ORACLEdependent fields appear on the dialog.
Operating Sequence
1. Key in the appropriate values for the ORACLE-dependent fields. The following list explains these fields: Database Name Specifies the system ID (SID) of the ORACLE database. Database Management System Location Specifies the ORACLE home path (where ORACLE is installed). OS Username Specifies a valid OS log-in name on the server machine. Password Specifies the OS log-in password, if any. For a given ORACLE SID, all schemas created using that SID must have the same OS Username and Password combination. 2. When complete, select the Run button to execute the dialog and create the schema. OR Select the Restore button to clear all the fields on the dialog.
OR Select the Force button to drop previously created RIS dictionary objects (such as RIS tables, views, indexes, and schema privileges) before creating the new schema. OR Select the Close button to exit the dialog without creating a schema.
Create Schema (INGRES)

When you select the INGRES DBMS from the Create Schema dialog, the INGRESdependent fields appear on the dialog.
Operating Sequence
1. Key in the appropriate values for the INGRES-dependent fields. The following list explains these fields: Database Name Specifies the INGRES database name accessible to the schema. Database Management System Location Needed for all UNIX server nodes. It is optional for VAX installations. This option provides RIS with the location of the INGRES software on the remote system. It should be the same as the UNIX environment variable II_SYSTEM on the remote system. 2. When complete, select the Run button to execute the dialog and create the schema. OR Select the Restore button to clear all the fields on the dialog. OR
R - 44
DB Access Commands
Select the Force button to drop previously created RIS dictionary objects (such as RIS tables, views, indexes, and schema privileges) before creating the new schema. OR Select the Close button to exit the dialog without creating a schema.
Create Schema (DB2)

When you select the DB2 DBMS on the Create Schema dialog, the DB2-dependent fields appear on the dialog.
Operating Sequence
1. Key in the appropriate values for the DB2-dependent fields. The following list explains these fields: Database Name Specifies a DB2 database name accessible by the schema. It is case sensitive. Group Name Specifies the RACF group name for TCPIP protocol. The RACF group name is passed to the RIS Transaction Processor security exit on the IBM mainframe system for use during sign-on processing. (Optional.) OS Username Specifies a valid OS log-in name on the server machine. Password Specifies the OS log-in password, if any. For LU6.2 protocol, the Group Name field is ignored in this version of RIS. IBM Network Protocol Specifies the network protocol that RIS uses to get to the IBM machine on which the DBMS resides. The IBM network protocols LU6.2 and TCP are displayed.
2.
Select a protocol. The following fields are valid for LU6.2 network protocol only:
RIS LU Name Specifies SSI local LU name, either fully qualified or local. It is case sensitive. Host LU Name Specifies SSI remote LU name, either fully qualified or local. It is case sensitive. LU62 Mode Name Name of the Intergraph System Administrator assigned to the node that permits communication to the RIS program on an IBM machine. The mode assigns attributes to the connection and must be predefined by the Intergraph System Administrator. The Mode Name is defined when LU6.2 is configured. This value is case sensitive. Host Program Name Specifies the name the IBM System Administrator called the RIS server when it was installed on the IBM, the CES transaction name. This name is case sensitive.
R - 46
DB Access Commands
The following fields are valid for TCP network protocol only:
IBM Nodename or Address Specifies the TCPIP hostname or IP address of the IBM mainframe system. IBM Port Specifies the TCPIP port number assigned to the RIS Transaction Processor server on the IBM Mainframe system. (Required.) 3. When complete, select the Run button to execute the dialog and create the schema. OR Select the Restore button to clear all the fields on the dialog. OR Select the Force button to drop previously created RIS dictionary objects (such as RIS tables, views, indexes, and schema privileges) before creating the new schema. OR Select the Close button to exit the form without creating a schema.
Create Schema (RDB)

When you select the RDB DBMS from the Create Schema dialog, the RDB-dependent fields appear on the dialog.
Operating Sequence
1. Key in the appropriate value for Database Name to specify the name of the database the schema accesses. When complete, select the Run button to execute the dialog and create the schema. OR Select the Restore button to clear all the fields on the dialog. OR Select the Force button to drop previously created RIS dictionary objects (such as RIS tables, views, indexes, and schema privileges) before creating the new schema. OR Select the Close button to exit the form without creating a schema.
2.
Create Schema (SYBASE)

When you select the SYBASE DBMS from the Create Schema dialog, the SYBASEdependent fields appear on the dialog.
R - 48
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
1. Key in the appropriate values for the SYBASE-dependent fields. The following list explains these fields: Database Name Specifies the name of the database the schema accesses. Database Management System Location Specifies the path where SYBASE is installed. This field is not used if SYBASE SQL Server 04.02.XX on Windows NT is the database server. See the README.TXT file delivered with the RISSYBDS product more more information. OS Username Specifies a valid OS log-in name on the server machine. Password Specifies the OS log-in password, if any. DSQUERY Specifies the database query listener. It is the alias given in the interface file. The SYBASE SQL Server 04.02.XX on Windows NT does not use the interface file, so this field is not necessary for this server. IFILE Specifies the interface filename. This field is not used if the SYBASE SQL Server 04.02.XX is the database server. 2. When complete, select the Run button to execute the dialog and create the schema. OR Select the Restore button to clear all the fields on the dialog. OR Select the Force button to drop previously created RIS dictionary objects (such as RIS tables, views, indexes, and schema privileges) before creating the new schema.
OR Select the Close button to exit the dialog without creating a schema.
Create Schema (OS400)

When you select the OS400 DBMS from the Create Schema dialog, the OS400-dependent fields appear on the dialog.
Operating Sequence
1. Key in the appropriate values for the OS400-dependent fields. The following list explains these fields: Database Name Specifies the name of the AS/400 SQL collection where user tables are located and new tables are created. The value must be a valid AS/400 library name. RIS Dictionary Database Name Specifies the name of the AS/400 SQL collection where the RIS dictionary objects are located. This may be the same as Database Name, but need not be. The value must be a valid AS/400 library name. OS400 Network Protocol Specifies the path where the RDBMS is installed for UNIX. This field is disabled for Windows NT. Mode Name Specifies the SNA mode name used to connect to the AS/400. The value is supplied by your AS/400 System Administrator. The value must be entered in uppercase. OS Username Specifies the operating system username. Password Specifies the password for the operating system username.
R - 50
DB Access Commands
RIS LU Name Specifies the local SNA LU name used to connect to the AS/400. The value is supplied by your AS/400 System Administrator. The value must be entered in uppercase. Host LU Name Specifies the remote SNA name used to connect to the AS/400. The value is supplied by your AS/400 System Administrator. The value must be entered in uppercase. Host Program Name Specifies the name of the RIS OS/400 Transaction Processor program. The value is supplied by your AS/400 System Administrator. The value must be entered in uppercase, as PROGRAM or LIBRARY/PROGRAM, as supplied by your AS/400 System Administrator. The values for Mode Name, RIS LU name, and Host LU Name must also be configured in the SNA software configuration for the gateway server. 2. When complete, select the Run button to execute the dialog and create the schema. OR Select the Restore button to clear all the fields on the dialog. OR Select the Force button to drop previously created RIS dictionary objects (such as RIS tables, views, indexes, and schema privileges) before creating the new schema. OR Select the Close button to exit the dialog without creating a schema.
Drop Schema
The Drop Schema dialog is used to drop schemas using the information you specify and corresponds directly to the RIS drop schema statement.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Drop Schema button from the Schema Definition dialog.
The Drop Schema dialog is displayed. 2. Key the schema name into the Schema Name field on the Drop Schema dialog, or select a schema from the schema list on the RIS Schema Manager dialog. If the schema is a secure schema, a subform is displayed. Enter the database username, database password, operating system username, and operating system password in the subform, if displayed. 3. Select the Run button to execute the dialog and drop the schema.
OR Select the Force button to drop previously created RIS dictionary objects (such as RIS tables, views, indexes, and schema privileges) before creating the new schema. The Force button removes the schema regardless of who RIS thinks may be using it.
OR Select the Close button to exit the Drop Schema form without dropping the schema.
R - 52
DB Access Commands
Secure Schema Access

The Secure Schema Access dialog provides access privileges to a secure schema.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Secure Schema Access button from the Schema Definition dialog.
The Secure Schema Access dialog displays. If a schema has already been selected from the RIS Schema Manager dialog, this schema information displays on the Secure Schema Access dialog. 2. Select a schema from the RIS Schema Manager dialog or key in a schema name to display information about a schema, if the schema you want is not already the active schema. A subform is displayed. Enter the database username, database password, operating system username, and operating system password in the subform, if displayed. 3. Select the Action toggle and the Privilege toggle to choose between granting and revoking resource and connect privileges. Specify a username. Select the Run button to grant or revoke secure schema access. OR Select the Close button to exit the Secure Schema Access form without altering a schema.
4. 5.
Dictionary Access
This dialog grants and revokes access to a dictionary for a selected user.
Operating Sequence
Select the Dictionary Access button from the Schema Definition dialog.
The Dictionary Access dialog is displayed. 1. Select a schema from the RIS Schema Manager dialog or key in a schema name to display information about a schema, if the schema you want is not already the active schema. If the schema is a secure schema, a subform is displayed. Enter the database username, database password, operating system username, and operating system password in the subform, if displayed. 2. 3. 4. Select the Action toggle to choose between granting and revoking access. Enter the name of the user to be granted or revoked access in the Selected User field. Select the Run button to grant or revoke dictionary access.
OR Select the Close button to exit the dialog without granting or revoking dictionary access.
R - 54
DB Access Commands
Modify Schema Password Form

This dialog lets you modify the schema password.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Modify Schema Password dialog from the Schema Definition form.
The Modify Schema Password dialog is displayed. 2. Select a schema from the RIS Schema Manager dialog or key in a schema name to display information about a schema, if there is no active schema. Key in the new password. If the schema is a secure schema, a subform is displayed. Enter the database username, database password, operating system username, and operating system password in the subform, if displayed. 4. 5. Key in the original password. Select the Run button to alter the schema. You must select the Run button after each action to alter the schema.
3.
OR Select the Close button to exit the dialog without altering the schema.
Modify Node Information

This dialog lets you modify node information.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Modify Node Information form from the Schema Definition form.
The Modify Node Information dialog is displayed. 2. Select a schema from the RIS Schema Manager or key in a schema name to display information about a schema. Select the Modify Node button from the dialog. The current addresses display in the Nodename or Address fields. Key in the new names or addresses in the fields. This action can also be used to change the order of the protocols. 4. Select the Modify User Password button. The database user associated with the schema appears in the DB Username field. (This is a read-only field.) Key in the database user password in the Password field. This action does not change the users operating system account password. It changes only the RIS product copy of the user password. Typically, this command is executed after users change their operating system account passwords. Otherwise, an error occurs.
3.
5.
R - 56
DB Access Commands
6.
Select the Modify OS User & Password button. The operating system user associated with the schema appears in the OS Username field. Key in a new username. Key in the operating system user password in the Password field. Select the Run button. You must select the Run button after each action to alter the schema.
7. 8.
OR Select the Close button exit the dialog without altering the schema.
Modify DB2 Password

This dialog lets you modify the DB2 password. This operation is valid only for DB2 schemas.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Modify DB2 Password button from the Schema Definition form.
The Modify DB2 Password form is displayed. 2. Select a schema from the RIS Schema Manager dialog or key in a schema name to display information about a schema, if the schema you want is not already the active schema. Key in the original password and the new password. The Alternate LU62 Mode field appears if this information is required. Key in the LU6.2 mode value if the field displays. Select the Run button to alter the schema. This action changes both the MVS system password and the schema password. You must select the Run button after each action to alter the schema.
3.
4.
OR Select the Close button to exit the dialog without altering the schema.
R - 58
DB Access Commands
Data Definition
The Data Definition dialog displays information about the tables, views, and indexes defined for the specified schema. The Data Definition function can perform six data definition actions. It can: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Display table information Create tables Drop tables Alter tables Include tables Exclude tables
When one of these actions is selected, a subform associated with that action displays. If the selected schema requires a password, or a database username/password and operating system username/password, the information must be keyed in before the subforms can accept input.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Data Definition button from the RIS Schema Manager dialog. The Data Definition dialog is displayed.
2.
Select a schema from the RIS Schema Manager form or key in a schema name, if the schema you want is not already the active schema.
3. 4.
Select one of the six actions to perform. Select the Close button to exit the dialog.
R - 60
DB Access Commands
Table Information
The Table Information dialog displays the definition of the specified table. The column fields display information such as the column position, column name, column type, and whether or not nulls are permitted in the column for each column in the table. Also, a field is provided to search for specific columns. This dialog only displays information; it is not editable.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Table Information button from the Data Definition dialog. The Table Information form is displayed.
2.
Select a table by keying in the table name in the Table Name field or by selecting the table from the list on the Data Definition dialog. Select the Close button to exit the dialog.
3.
Create Table Form

The Create Table dialog creates tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. If the name of an existing table is keyed in to the Table Name field, or selected from the list on the Data Definition dialog, the definition of that table is loaded into the Create Table dialog. This can be useful when creating several similar tables. The Create Table form creates new tables. It cannot be used to modify existing tables. The ability to load existing table definitions into the form exists only to provide a template, or starting point, for new tables.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Create Table button from the Data Definition dialog. The Create Table dialog is displayed.
The Mode Control buttons are used to execute and reset the different modes of the dialog. The Create Table form operates in three modes that are represented by three buttons: Insert Column New columns can be added to the table definition. If a column is selected in the table definition list, the new column is inserted in front of the selected column. Otherwise the new column is appended to the list. Select the Mode Run button to insert the column. Drop Column Columns can be dropped from the table definition. The column to be dropped must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field, or by selecting the column in the table definition list. Select the Mode Run button to drop the column. Modify Column Column definitions can be modified. The column to be modified must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field, or by selecting the column in the table definition list. Select the Mode Run button to modify the column.
R - 62
DB Access Commands
2. 3.
Select a table by keying in the table name in the Table Name field. Select the Run button to execute the dialog and create the table. OR Select the Restore button to clear the dialog. OR Select the Close button to exit the dialog without creating the table.
Drop Table
This dialog is used to drop tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition dialog.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Drop Table button from the Data Definition dialog.
The Drop Table dialog is displayed. 2. Specify the table to be dropped by keying in the table name in the Table Name field or by selecting the table from the list on the Data Definition dialog. Select the Run button to drop the table.
3.
OR Select the Close button to exit the dialog without dropping the table.
R - 64
DB Access Commands
Alter Table
The Alter Table dialog is used to alter existing tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition dialog. This form behaves like the RIS alter table command. It can only append one new column at a time to an existing table.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Alter Table dialog from the Data Definition form. The Alter Table dialog is displayed.
2.
Define the new column by entering the information in the fields of the Column Definition to Append to Table area. Select the Run button to execute the dialog and alter the table. Repeat Step 1 to define another new column. OR Select the Restore button to clear the dialog. OR Select the Close button to exit the dialog.
3.
Include
This dialog lets you include tables and views from the in-memory data dictionary.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Include button from the Data Definition dialog. The Include dialog is displayed.
2. 3. 4.
Key in, or select from the list, the names you want to include. Set the Type toggle to the appropriate setting. Select the Run button. You must select the Run button after each action to alter the schema. OR Select the Restore button to clear all the fields on the dialog. OR Select the Close button to exit the dialog without altering the schema.
R - 66
DB Access Commands
Exclude
This dialog lets you exclude tables and views from the in-memory data dictionary.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Exclude button from the Data Definition dialog. The Exclude dialog is displayed.
2. 3. 4.
Key in, or select from the list, the names you want to exclude. Set the Type toggle to the appropriate setting. Select the Run button. You must select the Run button after each action to alter the schema. OR Select the Restore button to clear all the fields on the dialog. OR Select the Close button to exit the dialog without altering the schema.
Schema File
This dialog lets you review and manipulate schema files. By default, RIS maintains the schema file /usr/ip32/risschemas, which tracks the schemas known to RIS.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Schema File button from the RIS Schema Manager dialog. The Schema File dialog is displayed.
2.
Select one of the control buttons on the right side of the form. If you select the Locate Schema File button, all the fields become active, letting you key in the appropriate values. Show Schema File Location Produces read-only information on the specified schema file. Locate Schema File Lets you rename your schema file or specify a different protocol. Checksum Schema File Recomputes the checksum for the specified schema file. Checksum is a mechanism used to verify that the schema file has not been corrupted. If you manually edit the file (instead of making changes through the RIS Schema Manager), checksum is no longer accurate.
3.
Key in the appropriate values on the dialog when the Locate Schema File button is selected. The following list explains the different parts of the Schema File dialog. Local, XNS, TCP, Decnet This checklist lets you select a protocol for your schema file. Schema File Name Specifies the name of a schema file. The full pathname for the schema file must be specified unless the RIS HOME directory (the default directory) is intended.
R - 68
DB Access Commands
Nodename or Address Specifies the nodename or address where the schema file resides. If the complete path is not specified, the filename is assumed to be located where RIS was installed. Username Specifies a system username that has access to the schema file. A schema file must be readable by all users that are permitted to access the schemas. A schema file must be readable and writable by all users authorized to create, alter, or drop schemas. The users permitted to create, alter, and drop schemas must be able to create and delete files in the directory where the schema file is located. Password This field specifies a system password associated with Username. 4. Select the Run button to execute the dialog.
OR Select the Cancel button to exit the dialog without changing the schema.
Locate Client
The Locate Client dialog is used to review and specify the location of a RIS client process.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Locate Client button from the RIS Schema Manager dialog. The Locate Client dialog is displayed.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Key in the nodename or address. Key in the name of the database user. Key in the database user password, if any. Select one of the following: Local TCP XNS Decnet
6.
Select the Show Client Location button to show the current location of the RIS Client process. Select the Locate Client button to specify a new location for the RIS Client process. Select the Run button to reload the client. OR Select the Restore button to clear all the fields. OR Select the Close button to exit the Locate Client dialog without relocating the client.
7. 8.
R - 70
DB Access Commands
Set
The Set dialog sets the ANSI mode on or off, Autorename on or off, and enables different databases.
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Set button from the RIS Schema Manager dialog. The Set dialog is displayed.
The default setting is Mode ANSI: On, Autorename: On, and Database Enable: All. Setting any of these functions only affects the remainder of the RIS Schema Manager session. You can modify only one mode at a time. 2. Select the Set Mode ANSI button and set the Mode ANSI toggle to ON or OFF. If you set the Mode ANSI toggle to ON, schema, table, column, view, and index names are limited to 18 characters. Use this mode only when creating names (for tables, columns, and so forth) that should be ANSI compliant (18 characters, or fewer.) If you set the Mode ANSI toggle to OFF, Names can be up to 31 characters long, based upon the underlying RDBMS. Remember, though, that these names may not be portable. 3. If you Set Autorename on, schema, table, column, view, and index names are longer than the particular database limitation. RIS will automatically do renaming. Select the Set Database Enable button to specify RDBMSs that can be used. Use this function when you want to create table or column names that conflict with the keywords of other databases.
4.
5.
Select the Run button to execute the dialog. OR Select the Restore button to clear the fields. OR Select the Cancel button to exit the dialog without setting the mode or enabling databases.
R - 72
DB Access Commands
Rotate (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Rotate command places a Rotate button, which moves the raster image in the window area in a counter-clockwise direction.
Dialog Options
When you select Rotate, the Rotate dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
R - 74
DB Access Commands
Rotate Raster (Raster Graphics)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Rotate Raster command moves the raster image in the window area in a counterclockwise direction.
DB Access Commands S - 1
Save Dialog (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Select the Save Dialog (Dialog Builder) command to save the current dialog to a template library. If a dialog with the same name exists in the library, you must confirm that you want to replace the previous version. The Save command is also available from the Toolbar.
Dialog Options
When you select a Save function, the DBA Save Template dialog appears.
Library This field displays the name of the current template library. You can select the field and key in the name of a different template library. You can create a new template library by keying in a template library name that does not exist (full or relative filename). You are asked to confirm that you want to create a new library. Name This field displays the name of the current template (if one exists). Select the field and key in a new name. Description This field lets you enter a description of the template.
S-2
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Save function. The Save Template dialog appears. 2. Accept the default values or edit the fields as necessary. Select OK to save the template. The template is written to the specified library. If a template with the same name already exists in the library, you are asked to confirm that you want to replace the old template with the new one. a. b. Select Yes to replace the existing template with the new one. Select No to cancel the write.
OR Select Cancel to dismiss the dialog without saving the template.
Save Options
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Use the Save button on the Design Options dialog to save commonly used parameters to an optional template.
Dialog Options
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Save function. The Save Template dialog appears. 2. Accept the default values or edit the fields as necessary. Select OK to save the template. The template is written to the specified library. If a template with the same name already exists in the library, you are asked to confirm that you want to replace the old template with the new one. a. Select Yes to replace the existing template with the new one.
S-4
DB Access Commands
b.
Select No to cancel the write.
Save Report
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Save Report command saves the current report to a template library. If a template with the same name exists in the library, you must confirm that you want to replace the previous version. In most cases, errors received while saving a report template are only warnings. Usually, the report template is written successfully.
Dialog Options
S-6
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
1. Select the Save function. The Save Template dialog appears. 2. Accept the default values or edit the fields as necessary. Select OK to save the template. The template is written to the specified library. If a template with the same name already exists in the library, you are asked to confirm that you want to replace the old template with the new one. a. b. Select Yes to replace the existing template with the new one. Select No to cancel the write.
Schema Select (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Schema Select command places a Schema field that lets a user select a new current schema.
Dialog Options
When you select Schema Select, the Schema Select dialog appears.
Simple This radio button makes a Simple combo box. The list is always displayed, and text can be entered in the field.
S-8
DB Access Commands
Dropdown This radio button makes a Dropdown combo box. The list is displayed whenever the arrow is chosen, and ANY text can be entered in the field without being in the list. Dropdown List This radio button makes a ADropdown List combo box. The list is displayed whenever the arrow is chosen, and text can NOT be entered in the field (that is, only selections from the list can be used). Use the Predefined list values field of the List option to provide a schema list. This lets a database dialog or single-table report run on several selected schemas without setting DBA_SCHEMA_LIST.
Operating Sequence
Scrollbar (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Scrollbar command places a scroll bar. You can use scripts to set or read the value of the scroll bar. The values can be set through the FIg_set_value script function, or by a data link from another gadget.
Dialog Options
When you select Scrollbar, the Scrollbar dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Text Font, and Location options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options. High Value This field specifies the maximum value of the scroll slider (that is, when it is positioned at the far right for a horizontal scroll bar or the top for a vertical scroll bar). Low Value This field specifies the minimum value of the scroll slider (that is, when it is positioned at the far left for a horizontal scroll bar or the bottom for a vertical scroll bar). Viewable Portion This field specifies the percentage of the scroll area filled by the slider. It also controls the increment by which the display changes when the top or bottom scroll arrows are selected (that is the size of a page). Key in a value between 1 and 100.
S - 10
DB Access Commands
Vertical Scroll Bar/Horizontal Scroll Bar This toggle specifies whether the scroll bar moves the field display from top to bottom or from left to right.
Operating Sequence
Select Redlines (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Select Redlines command places a Select Redlines button, which selects the redlines on the drawing by the user.
Dialog Options
When you select Select Redlines, the Select Redlines dialog appears.
S - 12
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Set Query (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Set Query command places a Set Query button, which lets you initialize the query criteria, load a saved query template, and process the query criteria in one step. You associate a saved query template with a Set Query button. When a user selects the Set Query button, the query criteria is initialized, and the specified template is loaded from the template library and processed to generate a universe of rows.
Dialog Options
When you select Set Query, the Set Query dialog appears.
S - 14
DB Access Commands
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Place Text/Place Symbol, Text Font, and Location options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options. Template This field lets you specify the name of the query template to associate with the function button. You can key in a template name or use the list indicator to select from the query templates in the current template library. At runtime, the users current template library (set with the DBA_LIB environment variable) should contain a query template with the name specified in the Template field.
Operating Sequence
Show Group (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Show Group command lets you highlight all gadgets in a given group.
S - 16
DB Access Commands
Show Links (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Show Links command places a Show Links button, which displays linkages in the specified window.
Dialog Options
When you select Show Links, the Show Links dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
S - 18
DB Access Commands
Show Links (Raster Graphics)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Show Links command displays linkages in the specified window. When you select Show Links and a window, any databases, notes, or file linkages display.
Single Column (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Single Column command lets you place a single column field on the current dialog. The dialog can be a Database dialog (that is, associated with a specific schema and table) or it can be a No Database dialog. DB Access stores the column name/number associated with the column field. When you select the Process Query button on the dialog, the single column field displays values for the specified column from the universe of rows generated by the Process Query.
Database Dialog
You can place a single column field for a specified table and column on a Database dialog. If you place a single column field for a coded column, the field is placed with a list indicator, which lets you select values from the columns associated code list. Coded single column fields can also present a subset of the code list by supplying values in the predefined list values field. You can also have list indicators for non-coded single column fields. For either coded or noncoded single column fields, restrict the users choices to the list by setting the Verify against list toggle on the Default/Verify dialog. Use single column fields to link information from two or more tables by way of join columns. For example, in the sample database, the tables parts and sale both contain the column part_num. You can design a dialog that accesses information in both tables based on the common column value (part_num). See the section Join Columns.
S - 20
DB Access Commands
No Database Dialog
Single column fields on No Database dialogs are associated with the current table at runtime. If no current table is specified or if the current table has no corresponding column, no information displays in the field.
Dialog Options
When you select Single Column, the Single Column dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Text Font, and Location options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options. Length This field specifies the character length of the column field. Decimal Places This field specifies the number of decimal places for a numeric column. Codelist Rows This field lets you specify how many entries from the code list appear at one time. Scroll through the list to see additional entries. This field is inactive until a coded column is specified in the Column field. Minimum Value This field lets you specify a minimum value that you can enter successfully for the column field. This field is active only for numeric columns. Maximum Value This field lets you specify a maximum value that the user can enter successfully for the column field. This field is active only for numeric columns. Field Options This subdialog lets you call other dialogs to set further parameters. Select from Editing, Scrolling, List, and Default/Verify. The respective dialogs are described in the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder).
By using the Default/Verify option Default field values, you can override the default value for the single column field provided by mscolumns. By using the Default/Verify option Format string, you can override the original format string for a numeric single column field provided by mscolumns. You can wrap long single column fields in a multiple line display. The lines are concatenated before database processing. DB Access allows notification on wrapped fields without carriage return. This supports the Editing option Notify at end.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Single Column from the Dialog Builder menu panel. The Single Column dialog appears. 2. At the Column field, enter the name of a column from the current table using key-in or the list indicator. Go to Step 5. OR At the Schema and/or Table field, enter a new schema and/or table using key-in or the list indicator. The DBA Join Columns dialog appears.
3.
At the Column field for the primary table, enter the name of the join column using key-in or the list indicator. Repeat for the secondary table. Then Specify whether the join is an outer join. Select OK to return to the Single Column dialog. The DBA Join Columns dialog disappears. The Join Columns button on the Single Column dialog is active.
4.
At the Column field on the Single Column dialog, use a key-in or the list indicator to enter the name of the column from the secondary table that you want to place.
S - 22
DB Access Commands
5.
Set any other parameters as needed. Select OK. If you selected Keyin and specified coordinates, the field is automatically placed on the dialog. OR If you selected Data Point, the field is dynamically attached to the cursor. The x,y coordinates appear in the message area so you can position the field. Place the field by clicking the left mouse button. OR Select Cancel to end the field placement. Once you establish a join column between two tables, you can place additional column fields (single or multiple) from the secondary table. The DBA Join Columns dialog does not reappear.
Single Report (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Single Report command places a Report button, which is linked to a report template in the current template library. When you select Report, the report template is processed and the report output is written to the screen. You can specify a saved query criteria template to generate the input universe of rows for the report; otherwise, the current universe of rows is used. The current template library at runtime must contain the specified report template (and optional query criteria template). You can specify the correct template library for the user by defining and exporting the DBA_LIB variable in the users .profile file. See the section DM/DB Access Environment Variables.
S - 24
DB Access Commands
Dialog Options
When you select Single Report, the Single Report dialog appears.
Report Template This field lets you associate a report template with the Report button. You can key in a template name or use the list indicator to select a template. Current Query/Saved Query This toggle lets you specify whether to use the current query criteria or a saved query criteria template to generate the input universe of rows for the report. The query criteria template must exist in the same template library as the report template. Display Output/No Display This toggle lets you specify whether the report output is displayed to the screen after processing. The report output is also written to the default output file. Query Template This field lets you specify a query criteria template to generate the input universe of rows for the report. You can key in a template name or use the list indicator to select a template. This field is active only when Saved Query is toggled on.
Operating Sequence
Slider (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Slider command places a slider with a range of values to be used with a particular command. The values can be through the FIg_set_value script function, or by a data line from another gadget.
Dialog Options
When you select Slider, the Slider dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Text Font, and Location options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options. Values This set of boxes lets you define the high, initial, and low values appearing on the slider. Display This set of boxes lets you control the display of the high, current, and low slider values. A check mark signals to display the value. Vertical This toggle lets you determine the orientation of the slider. It can be either vertical or horizontal.
S - 26
DB Access Commands
Minimum to Maximum This toggle lets you determine which value appears first. Minimum to Maximum The low value appears at the bottom if the slider is vertical and on the left if the slider is horizontal. Maximum to Minimum The low value appears at the top if the slider is vertical and on the right if the slider is horizontal. Increment This field lets you set the increments the slider moves by. Length This field lets you specify the number of characters on the slider button. Decimal This field lets you set the number of decimal places displayed for the slider values.
Spin Box (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Spin Box command places a spin box on the current dialog, for cycling through a range of values.
Dialog Options
When you select Spin Box, the Spin Box dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
S - 28
DB Access Commands
SQL Statement (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The SQL Statement command places an SQL Statement gadget on the current dialog. When selected, the gadget will process the SQL statement associated with the gadget.
Dialog Options
When you select SQL Statement, the SQL Statement dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Place Text/Place Symbol, Text Font, and Location options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options.
Template This field lets you specify the name of the SQL template to associate with the button. Key in the template name or select from the associated list. The current template library at runtime must contain the specified SQL template. You can specify the correct template library for the user by defining and exporting the DBA_LIB variable in the users .profile file. See the section DM/DB Access Environment Variables.
Operating Sequence
S - 30
DB Access Commands
Symbol (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Symbol command lets you place symbols or bitmaps on the current dialog. DB Access can display symbols from Clipper sym files, or .bmp (bitmap) files that have been saved in the template library with the Bitmap Loader. You can create symbols with the Symbol Editor, a baseline product delivered with all Intergraph systems. See the Symbol Editor Users Guide for information on using the Symbol Editor.
Dialog Options
When you select Symbol, the Symbol dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Location options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for descriptions of these options. Symbol File This field displays the name of the symbol file. By default, dbasym is specified. To specify a different symbol file, clear the field and key in a new file name. If this file is not in the c:\win32app\ingr\dba\support directory, you must define DBA_SUPPORT to include the directory path of the file. See the section DM/DB Access Environment Variables. Symbol ID This field displays the number of the symbol file to be loaded. Bitmap Allows placement of a Bitmap template. For more information see Bitmap Loader.
Symbols This field displays the DBA Symbol Selection dialog. You can select a symbol from this dialog to place on a dialog. These symbols are used in the DB Access product. When you select Symbols, the Symbol Selection dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
S - 32
DB Access Commands
System Command (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The System Command command places a System Command button, which you can associate with a system command. When a user selects the button, the command is executed. DB Access will not wait until the system command completes if the global variable dba_system_no_wait is true. The dba_system_window determines whether a window will be displayed. See c:\win32app\ingr\doc\globals.txt for a description of these variables.
Dialog Options
When you select System Command, the System Command dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Place Text/Place Symbol, Text Font, and Location options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options.
Command This field lets you specify the system command to associate with the button.
Operating Sequence
S - 34
DB Access Commands
DB Access Commands T - 1
Table Select (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Table Select command places a Table field that lets a user select a new current table.
Dialog Options
When you select Table Select, the Table Select dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Text Font, and Location options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options.
T-2
DB Access Commands
List Rows This field lets you specify how many tables will display at one time in the associated list field for the Table field. For example, if the current schema contains five tables, a value of 3 would cause three tables to appear in the list field. The scroll bar provides access to the remaining tables. Simple This radio button makes a Simple combo box. The list is always displayed, and text can be entered in the field. Dropdown This radio button makes a Dropdown combo box. The list is displayed whenever the arrow is chosen, and ANY text can be entered in the field without being in the list. Dropdown List This radio button makes a Dropdown List combo box. The list is displayed whenever the arrow is chosen, and text can NOT be entered in the field (that is, only selections from the list can be used.)
Operating Sequence
Text (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Text command lets you place text strings on the current dialog. You can select text font from the common dialog. Placing text lets you name dialogs and label areas on those dialogs.
Dialog Options
When you select Text, the Text dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Location, and Text Font options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for descriptions of these options. Text String This field specifies the text string to be placed. You can key in several lines of text.
Operating Sequence
T-4
DB Access Commands
Text Box (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Text Box command places text box on the current dialog, for text entry/display.
Dialog Options
When you select Text Box, the Text Box dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
Text (Report Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Text (Report Builder) command places a field that prints a literal text string you assign. Text fields are used to print text that remains the same in a report: titles, column headers, and so on. Text fields are commonly placed on preface, top, bottom, and final lines.
Menu Options
When you select Text (Report Builder), the DBA Text Field dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the menu except for the Print Condition field, which is described in the section Place Field. Text This field lets you specify the text string to print.
T-6
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Text Size
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Text Size command lets you change the size of the text display on a report template or a report output dialog. Make the text smaller to see more fields at the same time. Make the text larger to make the display easier to read. The text size setting can be saved as part of a design options template, using the Save Options command.
Dialog Options
When you select Text Size, the Text Size dialog appears.
Use the slider to set the text size. Text sizes range from 1 to 5. You may set the environment variable DBA_TEXT_SIZE to globally define the text size. Example: set DBA_TEXT_SIZE=1
T-8
DB Access Commands
Time
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Time command places a field that prints the system time in a format that you choose. You usually place time fields on a top or preface line.
Dialog Options
When you select Time, the Time Field dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the menu except for the Print Condition field, which is described in the section Place Field. Time Formats This checklist lets you select the print format for the time field.
Operating Sequence
DB Access Commands U - 1
Undelete Fence (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Undelete Fence (Dialog Builder) command restores the last fenced area deleted with the Fence Delete (Dialog Builder) command.
Operating Sequence
Select Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Fence and then Undelete from the pulldown menus. The last deleted fenced area is restored in its original location.
U-2
DB Access Commands
Undelete Field (Report Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Undelete Field (Report Builder) command restores the last field deleted with the Delete Field command.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Field and then Undelete from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select placement point appears. The field is dynamically attached to the cursor. As you move the cursor over the report template, information in the message area changes to reflect the current line, column, table, and field. DB Access uses F-1, F-2, and so on to represent the first, second, and any subsequent fields on a line. 2. Click the left mouse button to place the field. DB Access restores the field to the specified position. 3. Continue to copy the field to new positions. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command.
Undelete Gadget (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Undelete Gadget (Dialog Builder) command restores the last gadget deleted with the Delete Gadget (Dialog Builder) command.
Operating Sequence
Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Gadget and then Undelete from the pulldown menus. The last deleted gadget is restored in its original location.
U-4
DB Access Commands
Undelete Group (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Undelete Group (Dialog Builder) command restores the last gadget group deleted with the Group Delete (Dialog Builder) command.
Operating Sequence
Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Group and then Undelete from the pulldown menus. The last deleted gadget group is restored in its original location.
Undelete Line (Report Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Undelete Line (Report Builder) command restores the last line deleted with the Delete Line command.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Edit from the Toolbar menu. Select Line and then Undelete from the pulldown menus. The prompt Select placement point appears. The line is dynamically attached to the cursor. As you move the cursor over the report template, information in the message area changes to reflect the current line, column, table, and field. 2. Click the left mouse button to place the line. DB Access restores the line to the specified position. 3. Continue to copy the line to new positions. OR Click the right mouse button to exit the command.
U-6
DB Access Commands
Update View (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Update View command places an Update View button, which refreshes the specified raster window.
Dialog Options
When you select Update View, the Update View dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
U-8
DB Access Commands
Update (Raster Graphics)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Update command refreshes the selected window. To use the command, select Update and then a window.
Update Active (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Update Active command places the dialog in update active mode. You can change currently displayed column values without changing the corresponding values for the current row. Select Insert Row to insert the displayed data as a row in the database. For more information, see the section Insert Row (Database Edit).
Operating Sequence
The following sequence demonstrates how Update Active can be used with Insert Row to create a new row. 1. Select Update Active. The Update Active button appears to be depressed. The dialog is in update active mode; you can enter data on the displayed row without changing the database. 2. 3. Select a column field. Key in a value to be contained in the new row. Continue to select column fields and key in new values until all changes have been made. Select Insert Row to insert the displayed data as a new row in the database.
4.
U - 10
DB Access Commands
Update Active (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Update Active command places an Update Active button, which lets a user establish column values for a row before inserting it in the database. The Update Active function overrides the default key-in mode for the column field(s). The user can enter data without changing the displayed row in the database (change row), adding query criteria (add query), or performing a key column search (key column). When the data is correct, the user can select Insert Row to insert the displayed data as a row in the database.
Dialog Options
When you select Update Active, the Update Active dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
U - 12
DB Access Commands
Update Row (Database Edit)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Update Row command places the dialog in update row mode. You can change currently displayed column values without changing the corresponding values for the current row. You can then select Insert Row to insert the displayed data as a row in the database. For more information, see the section Insert Row (Database Edit).
Operating Sequence
The following sequence demonstrates how Update Row can be used with Insert Row to create a new row. 1. Select Update Row. The Update Row button appears to be depressed. The dialog is in update row mode; you can enter data on the displayed row without changing the database. 2. 3. Select a column field. Key in a value to be contained in the new row. Continue to select column fields and key in new values until all changes have been made. Select Insert Row to insert the displayed data as a new row in the database.
4.
Update Row (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Update Row command places an Update Row button, which updates the current row based on the currently displayed column values.
Dialog Options
When you select Update Row, the Update Row dialog appears.
U - 14
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Undo Redlines (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Undo Redlines command places a Undo Redlines button, which undo the redlines on the drawing by the user that were previous attached.
Dialog Options
When you select Undo Redlines, the Undo Redlines dialog appears.
U - 16
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
User Gadgets (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The User Gadgets are available from the DB Access Dialog Builder Toolbox. These gadgets have no builtin function. You can use script to read or write their values, or assign them a builtin function from the Common Dialog.
Text Box This command places a Text Box button on the current dialog, for text entry/display. Multi-Column Field This command places a Multi-Column Field button on the current dialog, for multi-column text entry/selection/display. List Box This command places a List Box button on the current dialog, for text selection. Grid This command places a Grid on the current dialog, for multi-column text selection. Combo Box This command places a Combo Box on the current dialog. Field Plus This command places a Field Plus on the current dialog. A Field Plus gadget is a custom control that offers full I/Forms functionality.
U - 18
DB Access Commands
Check Box/Radio Button This command places a Checklist Box or Radio Button on the current dialog, to display parameter states (on/off). Button This command places a text, bitmap or symbol button. Symbol This command places a Symbol or Bitmap on the current dialog. Scrollbar This command places a Scrollbar that can display a range of values. Use scripts to define the function or read the value of the scrollbar. Slider This command places a Slider that can display a range of values. Use scripts to define the function or read the value of the slider. Text This command places Text annotation on the current dialog. Group Box This command places a Group Box on the current dialog, to group a set of like-functioned gadgets. Spin Box This command places a Spin Box on the current dialog for cycling through a range of values. Rectangle This command places a Rectangle on the current dialog. You can select line weight, line style. Line This command places a Line which the user can change the line weight and/or line style. Gauge This command places a Gauge that can display a percentage (from 1 to 100). Dial This command places a Dial that can display a range of values.
User Variable (Report Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The User Variable (Report Builder) command lets you create variables for use in scripts, user action statements, and derived fields. You can create variables to store three types of data: character, integer, and floating point.
Arrays
You can create single- and multi-dimension arrays. Single-dimension arrays are automatically resized if an element outside the arrays current size is referenced. Multidimension arrays are not automatically resized. For example, an integer variable num with an x array value of 10 is referenced by num[0] through num[9]. If num is referenced by an x subscript greater than the initial size, the variable is extended and processing continues.
Character Variables
Character user variables are designed to store text strings. For a single text string, the x size determines the length of the string, and the y size is set to 1. For an array of text strings, the x size determines the number of text strings allocated, and the y size determines the length of each.
U - 20
DB Access Commands
Dialog Options
When you select User Variable, the DBA User Variable dialog appears.
Name, Type, X, Y This select-only field lists the name, variable type, x size, and y size of the user variables defined for the current report template. Select a line to make it a marker (highlighted) line. The dialog cannot be in delete or edit mode. (That is, the Delete and Edit buttons are not depressed.) New variables can be added and the delete buffer inserted before a marker line. Add This button adds a variable to the user variable list. Select Add after you enter information in the Name, X Size, and Y Size fields and select a variable type at the bottom of the dialog. The new variable is inserted before the marker line in the user variable list. If no marker line exists, the new variable is inserted at the bottom of the list. Edit This button places the dialog in edit mode. Select Edit and then select a variable from the user variable list. The values for the variable appear in the area at the bottom of the dialog. You can edit these values. Delete This button puts the dialog in delete mode; any line you select is deleted and stored in a delete buffer. The delete buffer stores deleted lines until you exit delete mode. Select Delete again to exit delete mode. The delete buffer is cleared whenever you enter delete mode. Undelete This button inserts the current delete buffer before the marker line in the user variable list. If no marker line exists, the delete buffer is inserted at the bottom of the list. Name This key-in field lets you specify the name of a new variable or edit the name of an existing one.
Variable Type This checklist lets you select a data type for the variable. X Size This key-in field lets you specify the x size of the variable. Y Size This key-in field lets you specify the y size of the variable.
U - 22
DB Access Commands
USTN Command (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The USTN Command places a MicroStation Key-in button, which lets you associate a MicroStation key-in command with the button you place. When the button is selected, MicroStation receives and executes the associated command.
Dialog Options
When you select USTN Command, the MicroStation Key-in dialog appears.
The following list describes the options on the dialog except for the Place Text/Place Symbol, Text Font, and Location options. See the section Place Gadget (Dialog Builder) for a description of these options. Command This field specifies the MicroStation key-in command associated with the button.
Operating Sequence
U - 24
DB Access Commands
DB Access Commands W - 1
Window Area (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Window Area command places a Window Area button, which displays the area specified by two points of a raster image.
Dialog Options
When you select Window Area, the Window Area dialog appears.
W-2
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Window Area (Raster Graphics)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Window Area command displays a specified area of a raster file. When you select Window Area and place two points in a window, the area defined by those points is displayed.
W-4
DB Access Commands
Window Center (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Window Center command places a Window Center button, which brings the selected points in a rater image to the center of the window.
Dialog Options
When you select Window Center, the Window Center dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
W-6
DB Access Commands
Window Center (Raster Graphics)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Window Center command, which bring the selected point in a raster image to the center.
Window Scroll (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Window Scroll command places a Window Scroll button, which moves a raster image from one specified point to another.
Dialog Options
When you select Window Scroll, the Window Scroll dialog appears.
W-8
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Window Scroll (Raster Graphics)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Window Scroll command moves the window area from one specified point to another. When you select Window Scroll and place two points in a window, the first point is moved to the location of the second point.
W - 10
DB Access Commands
Worksheet (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Worksheet command lets you place a gadget containing multiple column fields on a dialog. The dialog can be a Database dialog (that is, associated with a specific schema and table) or it can be a No Database dialog. Unlike a standard multiple column field, a worksheet can display more than one row at a time. When a user selects the Process Query button on the dialog, the worksheet displays values for the specified columns from the universe of rows generated by the Process Query.
Database Dialog
Worksheets on Database dialogs are associated with a specified table or with joined tables. You can use worksheets to link information from two or more tables by way of join columns. For example, in the sample database, the tables parts and sale both contain the column part_num. You can design a dialog that accesses information in both tables based on the common column value (part_num). See the section Join Columns.
No Database Dialog
Worksheets on No Database dialogs are associated with the current table at runtime. If no current table is specified, no information will display in the worksheet.
Dialog Options
When you select Worksheet, the Worksheet dialog appears.
The following Multi Column Field (MCF) commands are enabled for the worksheet: Visible rows This field specifies the number of rows displayed simultaneously in the field. Visible columns This field specifies the number of columns displayed simultaneously in the field. Header label This field specifies an additional MCF. This MCF functions as a header and horizontally scrolls in parallel with the original MCF. Column width These radio buttons determine how individual columns are sized for worksheets. They are disabled if the MCF has no database hook. Vertical scroll This check box lets the MCF scroll vertically. Display vertical scrollbar This check box displays the vertical scrollbar. Without it, the MCF can be scrolled with the arrow keys. Vertical scroll notify This check box causes scripts on the MCF to be processed when vertically scrolled. Column scrolling This check box enables column scrolling so that invisible columns can be displayed.
W - 12
DB Access Commands
Row select buttons This check box determines whether or not row select buttons are available on the MCF. Row select buttons notify DB Access of the row number selected. Entire row selection This check box lets you specify how a tap on a particular cell is interpreted. Single cell selection means that a tap activates only that field, and Entire row selection means that a tap on a cell activates all fields in the row. CR Required This check box lets you set this mode which forces you to press a Carriage Return before input to the MCF is processed. Column info This field allows setting of attributes for individual columns of the MCF. Data type These radio buttons let you specify the type of data to be entered in the field. Select ASCII, Integer, or Decimal. Justification These radio buttons let you specify the justification of the data to be entered in the field. Select Left, Center, or Right.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Worksheet from the Dialog Builder menu panel. The Worksheet dialog appears. a. b. 2. If you are placing a worksheet on a Database dialog, go to Step 2. If you are placing a worksheet on a No Database dialog, go to Step 3.
If you want to accept all default settings on the dialog, go to Step 3. OR Edit the dialog parameters as needed. For example: a. To place a worksheet for another table: At the Schema and/or Table field, enter a new schema and/or table using key-in or the list indicator. The DBA Join Columns dialog appears.
At the Column field for the primary table, enter the name of the join column using key-in or the list indicator. Repeat for the secondary table. Specify whether the join is an outer join. Select Exit and Save to return to the Worksheet dialog. The DBA Join Columns dialog disappears. The Join Columns button on the Worksheet dialog is active. The Table field displays the name of the secondary table. You can now place worksheet(s) for the secondary table. You must reselect the primary (original) table to place worksheet(s) for it. b. To specify an SQL select statement: Select the Based on select statement - YES toggle. The Select statement field appears. Key in a select statement. c. To exclude columns from the worksheet: In the Columns field, select the columns you want to exclude. d. To edit the Text field: Select the Include Selected Columns toggle. In the Text field, select and edit the column names. In the Columns field, select the columns you want to include. 3. Select OK from the Worksheet dialog to place the worksheet. If you selected Keyin and specified coordinates, the worksheet is automatically placed on the dialog. A worksheet header is attached. OR If you selected Data Point, the worksheet is dynamically attached to the screen cursor. The x,y coordinates appear in the message area so you can position the worksheet.
W - 14
DB Access Commands
Place the worksheet by tapping the left mouse button. The worksheet is placed in the specified location. A worksheet header is automatically attached. OR Select Cancel to abort the placement.
DB Access Commands Z - 1
Zoom In (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Zoom In command places a Zoom In button, which displays half as much of the specified raster image at twice the resolution.
Dialog Options
When you select Zoom In, the Zoom In dialog appears.
Z-2
DB Access Commands
Operating Sequence
Zoom In (Raster Graphics)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Zoom In command displays half as much of the specified file at twice the resolution. To use the command, select Zoom In and then place a point on the area to be magnified.
Z-4
DB Access Commands
Zoom Out (Dialog Builder)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Zoom Out command places a Zoom Out button, which displays twice as much of the specified raster image at half the resolution.
Dialog Options
When you select Zoom Out, the Zoom Out dialog appears.
Operating Sequence
Z-6
DB Access Commands
Zoom Out (Raster Graphics)
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
The Zoom Out command displays twice as much of the specified file at half the resolution. To use the command, select Zoom Out and the window.
Appendix A: DB Access Environment Variables AA - 1
Appendix A
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
DB Access Environment Variables
AA - 2 Appendix A: DB Access Environment Variables
Appendix A
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
DB Access Environment Variables

This section lists the environment variables that can be used by DB Access. DBA_AUTOCOMMIT Determines whether DB Access can turn autocommit off. See the file c:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc\autocomm.txt. Default = NO Specifies the background color for the raster display when raster graphics mode is active. Default = 15 Controls whether report output lines are padded with blanks to the length specified by columns per page. Default = NO Causes the script debugger to be automatically activated upon startup. The command line switch -D can also be used. Used to specify a script call when a button is pressed. See c:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc\butkey.txt for more details. If YES, code lists are sorted by ascending code text. If NO, code lists are sorted by ascending code number. Default = NO Specifies a script call that converts column values input by the user before passing them to the database, so that the user can work with units other than those stored in the database. See c:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc\convert.txt. Specifies a script call that converts column values from the database for output on menus and reports, so that the user can work with units other than those stored in the database. See c:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc\convert.txt.
DBA_BG_COLOR
DBA_BLANK_PAD
DBA_DEBUG
DBA_BUTTON_SCRIPT
DBA_CODE_SORT
DBA_CONVERT_INPUT
DBA_CONVERT_OUTPUT
DBA_DAP_FILE
Defines the text file that is used to associate the report index number stored in a Displayable Attribute with the name of a report to run. There should be one report name on each line of this file. Controls whether table and column specifications in dialog and report templates are written out as names (the default) or numbers (used in conjunction with mscolumns for schemas where table and column names will be translated). Causes the script debugger to be automatically activated upon startup. The command line switch -D can also be used. Redirects messages from the Errors Detected form to the specified file. Specifies the foreground color for the raster display when raster graphics mode is active. Default = 0 Controls whether Native or Shamrock fields are used (see doc/native.txt for details). 0 fields are Windows native controls unless the Field PLUS check box is selected from the Dialog Builder. 1 fields are always Windows native controls. 2 fields are always Shamrock custom controls. Causes DM/DBA to take on the CLIX look-and-feel. Setting this variable sets DBA_FORMS_COLORS and DBA_NATIVE_MODE to 2. Specifies the highlight color for the raster display when raster graphics mode is active. Default = 4 Specifies a script function to execute when DB Access starts. This can be used to initialize global variables. Causes DB Access to process secondary selects on outer and multi-schema joins when process query or universe review commands are issued to add duplicate rows caused by multiple hits in the secondary table. It increases processing times for these joins, and should be used only when one-to-many or many-tomany relationships exists. This flag is not necessary for standard, single schema joins or for any report joins. Default = NO
DBA_DB_NUMBERS
DBA_DEBUG
DBA_ERROR_LOG
DBA_FG_COLOR
DBA_FORMS_COLORS
DBA_FORMS_MODE
DBA_HL_COLOR
DBA_INITIAL_SCRIPT
DBA_JOIN_TO_MANY
DBA_KEY_SCRIPT
Specifies a script call when a key is pressed. See c:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc\butkey.txt for more details. Set to the template library DBA will use initially. Default = none List the template libraries to search when loading templates Default = none Determines type of linkage to be written to graphic elements by the Attach Linkage command, or read from graphic elements by the Review Element and Locate Graphics commands. Set to RIS for eight-word RIS (user data) linkages, or DMRS for standard four-word DMRS linkages. Default = "RIS" Causes DB Access to redirect all messages (normally displayed in the message field or message gadget) to the file specified by the DBA_LOG_ERROR shell variable. Default = NO This environment variable exists, you cannot invoke placement, manipulation, or subprocess commands, effectively making the design file read-only. Default is unrestricted. Sets dialog template name that DB Access or DB Access Runtime invokes initially. Default = none If NO, standard message strip is not displayed while dialogs are processed. Default = YES Specifies his own MSLINK column, to be used in linking database rows to MicroStation elements, or as a key column, or for DBA-driven incrementing of the key column upon inserts of new rows. The column must be an integer, and should be uniquely indexed. Default = mslink
DBA_LIB
DBA_LIB_LIST
DBA_LINK_MODE
DBA_LOG_MESSAGE
DBA_MCE_RESTRICT
DBA_MENU
DBA_MESSAGE_STRIP
DBA_MSLINK
DBA_NATIVE_MODE
Controls whether Native or Shamrock fields are used (see doc/native.txt for details). 0 fields are Windows native controls unless the Field PLUS check box is selected from the Dialog Builder. 1 fields are always Windows native controls. 2 fields are always Shamrock custom controls. Forces DB Access to build its table list from RISTABLES instead of MSCATALOG even if it exists. Default = NO Forces dialog text display style to be normal. Normal text displays considerably faster under X Windows, especially on PCs. Default = NO NFS-mounted template libraries are not be locked when reading (loading templates), if true. Useful for read-only sessions when NFS file locking is not desired. WARNING setting true may cause bad reads if other users are writing to the library. Default = NO Overrides automatic resizing of forms and dialogs based on screen size and based on resizing and moving the main dialog. Default = NO Disables the STOP sign on the DB Access message strip. Default = NO (STOP sign enabled.) Specifies the template library that compiled script objects are written to. If not defined, they are written to DBA_LIB. Optimizes response for large databases. See c:588ngr\dba\doc\optimize.txt for details and operational differences. Default = NO The name of an options template, used for setting active design options such as font name and body size, grid lock, color, line style, line weight, line depth, default CR mode, text justification, text style, verbose mode, text size, or lines and columns per report page.
DBA_NO_MSCATALOG
DBA_NORMAL_TEXT
DBA_NO_READ_LOCK
DBA_NO_SCALING
DBA_NO_STOP
DBA_OBJECT_LIB
DBA_OPTIMIZE
DBA_OPTIONS
DBA_PARTITION_BITS
Determines the number of bits to be ignored in the occurrence number in DMRS linkages to partitioned entities on graphic elements (can be determined by using DMRS on the VAX DMRS database, LIST e.!, where e is the entity number, use the Partition Number value). Can also be used to mask out the reuse counter, if set to zero (0). Default = 8 Specifies an interval (in seconds) between inputs when using the DBA_PLAYBACK_FILE option. Default is 1 Specifies a file (created by DBA_RECORD_FILE) for playing back all input from a previous DB Access session. Provides a queue name for the plot command whenever a Plot Window button is selected. Default = ilp811 Provides a format string for the print command issued whenever a PRINT button is selected (the %s in the string is replaced with the filename). Default = windows print dialog Specifies the name of the raster graphics control file. Previously this was done with the -d switch; this environment variable is now the preferred method. Specifies a default pathname to search for raster files, this applies to the cosmetic and dynamic raster gadgets. Specifies a file for recording all input in a DB Access session. This file can then be used in a subsequent playback session (see DBA_PLAYBACK_FILE). Used to preset report memory to be allocated so that large reports do not fragment memory by repeatedly adding small chunks. Set it to the number of bytes required to store all rows in memory (# of report rows times bytes per row, as specified by the Error allocating report memory ... error message). Default is 100000 Causes DBA to print an error message whenever a script or a numeric field references a NULL column value. Default = NO
DBA_PAUSE
DBA_PLAYBACK_FILE
DBA_PLOT_QUEUE
DBA_PRINT
DBA_RASTER
DBA_RASTER_PATH
DBA_RECORD_FILE
DBA_REPORT_MEMORY
DBA_REPORT_NULLS
DBA_SCHEMA
Set to the schema name DBA connect to initially. Default = none Set to a string of schemas for multi-database joins. Default = none Causes characters deleted from DBA fields to be put on the EnvironV scrap (so they may be accessed by other I/Forms applications). Setting this variable slows down field editing noticeably. Default = NO Provides a command string for the SHELL button on the DBA Message Strip. Default = "xterm -shell" Causes DB Access to write a compiled script object to DBA_OBJECT_LIB or DBA_LIB whenever a script is compiled. DB Access then reads this object in future sessions instead of recompiling the script again. Compiled objects are only read from DBA_OBJECT_LIB or DBA_LIB. Default = NO Sets to the DB Access support directories. (Only necessary when using multiple support paths. Separate paths with colons). Default = /usr/ip32/dba/support Causes DB Access to update all of the same table when a menus current row is changed. Default = NO Lets you select order in which table lists are sorted. Default = mscatalog.entitynum (if mscatalog exists), or ristables.table_name (if mscatalog does not exist). Presets Report Builder and Output text size (1-5, from the Text Size form). If this shell variable is not defined the default is 3. Overrides the default input/output format for timestamp columns. See c:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc\timestamp.txt for format details. Default = "yyyy-mm-dd:hh:nn:ss"
DBA_SCHEMA_LIST
DBA_SCRAP
DBA_SHELL
DBA_STORE_SCRIPT
DBA_SUPPORT
DBA_SYNC_MENUS
DBA_TABLE_ORDER
DBA_TEXT_SIZE
DBA_TIMESTAMP_FORMAT
DBA_TMP_OUTPUT
When set, this flag causes all report output to be placed in TMPDIR (usually /usr/tmp) with a unique name. This makes it easy to clean up report output as well as eliminating multiple user file conflicts. Controls the window priority of DBA dialogs. If not set, DBA dialogs are normal priority. If set, DBA dialogs are always on top of nontopmost windows. This is useful when running DBA from MicroStation. Forces all DBA RIS commands to be channeled through a DBASRV connection. This option requires the -n <node> command line switch. It is useful to prevent DBA_NFM applications from creating an extra connection to the NFM database. Set to YES for database write access, or NO for readonly. Default = YES
DBA_TOPMOST
DBA_USE_SERVER
DBA_WRITE_ACCESS
Certain global variables need only to be set to evaluate to true: DBA_AUTOCOMMIT DBA_BLANK_PAD DBA_CODE_SORT DBA_DB_NUMBERS For example:
set DBA_DB_NUMBERS=
DBA_MCE_RESTRICT DBA_NORMAL_TEXT DBA_NO_SCALING DBA_OPTIMIZE
The equal sign (=) is required. You can also specify a value, such as:
set DBA_DB_NUMBERS=YES
If these environment variables are not exported, they default to NO. The environment variables DBA_WRITE_ACCESS and DBA_MESSAGE_STRIP default to YES. You must set these variables to NO and export them to specify a condition other than the default. For example:
set DBA_WRITE_ACCESS=NO set DBA_MESSAGE_STRIP=NO
AA - 10
Appendix A: DB Access Environment Variables
Appendix B: DB Access Reserved Tables BB - 1
Appendix B
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
DB Access Reserved Tables
BB - 2
Appendix B: DB Access Reserved Tables
Appendix B
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
DB Access Reserved Tables

DB Access lets you create special reserved tables for various purposes. These tables are optional unless otherwise noted. mscatalog One means of providing for unique row identification. It is required by MicroStation 32 for databases used with graphics. mscatalog also maps table names to numbers for use with the mscolumns table. You can translate table names without changing the DB Access application. Supports the internationalization of DB Access. This table creates reference numbers for columns. You can translate column names without changing the DB Access application. Required for a schema using coded columns. Required for DB Access raster graphics. Required for DB Access raster graphics. Required for DB Access raster graphics.
mscolumns
mscodelist dba_links dba_files dba_points
The environment variable DBA_DB_NUMBERS can be set to YES to force DB Access to write out dialogs and report templates referencing tables and columns by number instead of name. If you create a reserved table with the Create/Alter Table function of the Schema Edit utility, DB Access automatically creates the columns for the table. B.1 B.2 B.3 B.4 Tables Needed for Raster Graphics Unique Row Identification Coded Columns and mscodelist mscolumns
BB - 4
B.1
Tables Needed for Raster Graphics
Several tables are required for DB Access raster graphics.
B.2
Unique Row Identification
DB Access requires unique row identification for the following Database Edit functions: Change Row Delete Row Previous Row Unique row identification is also required for DB Access to display the number of rows generated by the Process Query command. You can use any of three methods for unique row identification. Listed in order of precedence, they are: 1. 2. 3. Add an mslink column to each table. Define one or more key columns in the mscatalog table. Create a unique index for each table.
B.2.1
mslink Column
The default method for identifying unique rows is to add an mslink column to each table. This can be done through the Create/Alter Table dialog in the Schema Edit utility.
B.2.2
Key Columns (mscatalog Table)
The second method of identifying unique rows is to define one or more key columns in the mscatalog table. If the mscatalog table does not exist, you can create it using the Schema Edit utility.
The following are columns in an mscatalog table: tablename alias_name entitynum screenform reporttable sqlreview fencefilter dastable key_columns nextocc mslink char(32) (required) char(32) (optional) integer (required) char(64) (required for USTN) char(64) (required for USTN) char(240) (required for USTN) char(240) (required for USTN) char(32) (required for USTN) char(50)(optional) integer (optional) integer (optional)
The tablename column must be identical to any RIS-supported database table name to be accessed by DB Access. The alias_name column specifies a different name for the table that is not bound by SQL standard restrictions. The entitynum column determines table number, and may be matched with DMRS entities in existing VAX templates. The nextocc column provides a more efficient method of inserting rows with mslink columns. It eliminates the need for DB Access to issue the statement
select max (mslink) from <table>
in assigning an mslink value to the row inserted. You can set nextocc to the next mslink value available for insert, or let DB Access maintain the value. Any RIS-supported database table (ristables, mscatalog, and so forth) can be added to or removed from mscatalog.
Defining Key Columns

Once the mscatalog table exists, you can define key columns for any table with an occurrence in the mscatalog table. 1. From the DB Access main dialog, select mscatalog as the current table. Select Database Edit. From the Database Edit dialog, create a universe of all tables with occurrences in mscatalog.
2.
BB - 6
3. 4.
Make the table for which you want to define the key columns the current row. At the key_columns column, key in one or more column names, separated by spaces. The message Row changed appears.
5.
Using the same process, define key columns for any other tables in mscatalog. When you are finished, exit DB Access.
B.2.3
Unique Index
The third, and simplest, method for uniquely identifying rows in a non-graphic database is to create a unique index for a given table. From the SQL Statements dialog in DB Access, use the SQL create index statement:
create [unique] index <index> on <table> (<column> [, <column> ...])
To create a unique index called friendex on the name and nickname columns of the friends table:
create unique index friendex on friends (name, nickname)
B.3
Coded Columns and mscodelist
The mscodelist table has the following columns. All columns are required except mslink, which makes it easier to edit the table with Database Edit. See the section Unique Row Identification. table_name column_name join_table code_column text_column index_column index_value mslink char(32) char(32) char(32) char(32) char(32) char(32) integer integer
For a column to be considered coded, it must have a row entry in mscodelist where: table_name is the column table name. column_name is the column name. join_table is the table name of the code list. code_column is the name of an integer column in join_table. text_column is the name of a character column in join_table.
If multiple code lists are to be stored in one table, index_column is the name of an integer column in join_table that stores the index_value of each code list. For example, the following mscodelist entries table name _ ____ pipe pipe column name _ ____ material shape join table _____ material codelists code column _______ code_number code_number text column _______ code_text code_text index column _______ index_num index value _____ 2
would refer to two coded columns (material and shape) in the pipe table. The material column has its own code list (the join table named material) with the following columns: code_number _ ____________ 1 2 3 code_text _________ CONCRETE STEEL PVC
The shape column uses a shared code list (the join table named codelists) with the following columns: code_number _ ____________ 1 2 3 1 2 3 code_text _________ CONCRETE STEEL PVC CIRCULAR RECTANGULAR ELLIPTICAL index_num _ __________ 1 1 1 2 2 2
The shape column accepts values from rows in codelists where index_num is equal to 2.
BB - 8
B.4
mscolumns
The following are columns in the mscolumns table. Required columns are indicated. entitynum attrnum column_name alias_name column_format default_value mslink integer (required) integer (required) char(32) (required) char(32) char(10) char(10) integer
The entitynum column determines table number. The attrnum column determines column number. The column_name column specifies the name of the column (determined in the create table statement). If you set DBA_DB_NUMBERS to YES, dialog and report templates store column numbers instead of names. They can then be processed against translated databases without change. For more information, see the section DB Access Environment Variables. The alias_name column specifies a different name for the column that is not bound by SQL standard restrictions. The column_format column specifies a standard C format string (for example, "%lG") used when column values are output to custom dialogs built with the DB Access Administrator Toolkit. The default_value column specifies a string to be displayed when there is no current row (for subsequent inserts).
Appendix C: Timestamp Columns CC - 1
Appendix C
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Timestamp Columns
CC - 2
Appendix C: Timestamp Columns
Appendix C
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Timestamp Columns
Timestamp columns can be used to specify a date and time in a database row. They are useful for indicating when data was entered or updated in a database. By default, timestamp columns display in the following format: yyyy-mm-dd:hh:nn:ss. You can specify a timestamp format with the DBA_TIMESTAMP_FORMAT environment variable. The global variable char *dba_timestamp_format can then be modified at any time from script. You can also then input timestamp columns using the format specified by DBA_TIMESTAMP_FORMAT. For more information, see the section DM/DB Access Environment Variables.
Format Characters
Year yyyy yy y Month mm m month mon Day ddd dd d day dy Day of the year. One to three digits; no padding. Day of the month. Two digits padded with leading zeros. Day of the month. One or two digits; no padding. Name of day of the week. Up to nine characters; no padding. Name of day of the week. Three-character abbreviation; no padding. Two digits padded with leading zeros. One or two digits; no padding. Name of month. Up to nine characters; no padding. Name of month. Three-character abbreviation; no padding. Four digits padded with leading zeros. Last two digits padded with leading zeros. One to four digits; no padding.
CC - 4
Hour hh24 h24 hh12 or hh h12 or h Minute nn n Second ss s Other am or pm a.m. or p.m. text default Meridian indicator. Two characters; no padding. Meridian indicator with periods. 4 characters; no padding. Single quotation string is reproduced in destination string. Single quotation is reproduced in destination string. Any other character is reproduced in destination string. Two digits padded with leading zeros. One or two digits; no padding. Two digits padded with leading zeros. One or two digits; no padding. 24-hour mode. Two digits padded with leading zeros. 24-hour mode. One or two digits; no padding. 12-hour mode. Two digits padded with leading zeros. 12-hour mode. One or two digits; no padding.
To capitalize a word or abbreviation, capitalize the corresponding timestamp format element.
Examples
These examples indicate possible formats and the resulting output given the following date structure: date.year = 1990 date.month = 12 date.day = 5 date.hour = 10 date.minute = 33 date.second = 32 format = <m/d/y> buffer = <12/5/1990> format = "mm/dd/yy" buffer = "12/05/90" format = "mm/dd/yyyy" buffer = "12/05/1990" format = "dy, mon d yyyy" buffer = "wed, dec 5 1990"
format = "day, month d yyyy" buffer = "wednesday, december 5 1990" format = "day = day, month d yyyy" buffer = "day = wednesday, december 5 1990" format = "day = day, month d yyyy" buffer = "day = wednesday, december 5 1990" format = "Dy, Mon d yyyy" buffer = "Wed, Dec 5 1990" format = "Day, Month d yyyy" buffer = "Wednesday, December 5 1990" format = "DY, MON d yyyy" buffer = "WED, DEC 5 1990" format = "DAY, MONTH d yyyy" buffer = "WEDNESDAY, DECEMBER 5 1990" format = "DAY, MONTH d yyyy hh12:nn:ss AM" buffer = "WEDNESDAY, DECEMBER 5 1990 10:33:32 AM" format = "DAY, MONTH d yyyy hh:nn:ss P.M." buffer = "WEDNESDAY, DECEMBER 5 1990 10:33:32 A.M." format = "day, month d yyyy hh12:nn:ss am" buffer = "wednesday, december 5 1990 10:33:32 am" format = "day, month d yyyy hh:nn:ss p.m." buffer = "wednesday, december 5 1990 10:33:32 a.m." format = "day, month d yyyy hh24:nn:ss" buffer = "wednesday, december 5 1990 10:33:32" format = "Day the dth day of Month, yyyy" buffer = "Wednesday the 5th day of December, 1990" format = "The sth second of the nth minute of the h24th hour" buffer = "The 32nd second of the 33rd minute of the 10th hour"
CC - 6
Appendix D: DB Access Error Messages DD - 1
Appendix D
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
DB Access Error Messages
DD - 2
Appendix D: DB Access Error Messages
Appendix D
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
DB Access Error Messages

The following is a list of DB Access error messages and their meanings. Error Message Attach linkage failed. Meaning DB Access could not establish a linkage between the current row and a graphic element. DB Access cannot establish a linkage between the current row and a graphic element because the Linkage Mode field is set to None. Select another linkage mode. DB Access uses this column for unique row identification. You cannot change a value in this column. The Create/Alter Table command cannot be used to delete an existing column in a table (Alter table mode). Only columns in the add-column list (which do not yet exist) can be deleted. The Create/Alter Table command cannot be used to modify an existing column in a table (Alter table mode). Only columns in the add-column list (which do not yet exist) can be modified. You have tried to enter a value in a coded column that does not exist in the associated code list. You can enter only values from the code list. You have attempted to add a column to a table without specifying a column name. Specify parameters for the column before adding it.
Cannot attach linkage with mode = "None".
Cannot change key column.
Cannot delete existing column.
Cannot modify existing column.
Code list entry not found.
Column must have a name.
DD - 4
Columns per page out of range (1-2000).
You have specified too many or too few columns per page for report output. Enter a value from 1 to 2000. DB Access could not locate a graphic element linked to the current row. You can attach an element to the current row. Or change rows and select Locate Graphic to find an element linked to the new row. DB Access could not create the named template library. Either you do not have write access to the directory that you tried to create the library in, or, if the library exists, you do not have write access to it. DB Access could not locate the file. Check the spelling of the filename. Check that the path for the file is accurate. You have specified a column name that is not permitted. Key in up to 18 alphanumeric or underscore characters. The first character must be an alphabetic character. You have specified a table name that is not permitted. Key in up to 18 alphanumeric or underscore characters. The first character must be an alphabetic character. You have specified a template name that is not permitted. Key in up to 20 alphanumeric or underscore characters. You have specified a user variable name that is not permitted. Key in up to 20 alphanumeric or underscore characters. The first character must be an alphabetic character. You have defined a user variable with a wtr_ prefix. All wtr_ variables are reserved. Rename the variable. You have specified too many or too few lines per page for report output. Enter a value from 1 to 999.
Element not found.
Error creating template library "<library_name>".
File "<filename>" not found.
Invalid column name.
Invalid table name.
Invalid template name "<template>".
Invalid user variable name.
Invalid user variable name ("wtr_" prefix).
Lines per page out of range (1-999).
Maximum character length (2000) exceeded in user variable "<variable>". Maximum field length (200) exceeded.
You have exceeded the length allowed for a character user variable. Specify a character variable length of 2000 or less. You have exceeded the length allowed for a dialog field. Specify a field length of 200 or less. You have specified a filename of more than 14 characters. Enter a filename of 14 or fewer characters. You did not specify an input library for a function of the Template Librarian utility (/usr#/ip32/dba/bin/templib). You did not specify an output library for a function of the Template Librarian utility (/usr#/ip32/dba/bin/templib). You have attempted to add an mslink column to a table that already has an mslink column. You cannot place a column or numeric field on an all tables line. These fields must be placed on a single table line. A field must be current for this command. Select a field before selecting the command. A line must be current for this command. Select a line before selecting the command. A dialog must be current for this command. Load a dialog before selecting this command. This command requires a current report template. Load a template before selecting this command. A row must be current for this command. Use the query and current row functions to establish a current row. Then select the command. A schema must be current for this command. Key in or select a schema name before selecting the command.
Maximum filename length (14 characters) exceeded.
Missing input library specification.
Missing output library specification.
MSLINK already exists.
No COLUMN or NUMERIC fields allowed on "ALL" lines. No current field.
No current line.
No current dialog.
No current report.
No current row.
No current schema.
DD - 6
No current table.
A table must be current for this command. Key in or select a table name before selecting the command. This command requires a current universe of rows. Use the query functions to generate a current universe. This command requires that a means of uniquely identifying rows be provided for the table. See the section DB Access Reserved Tables for information on establishing key columns. You have attempted to add a coded column to a table in a schema that does not have an mscodelist table. You must create mscodelist before adding coded columns. No rows meet the current query criteria. DB Access could not locate the table. Check the spelling of the table name. Check that the correct library is current. You have specified a table that does not have a corresponding row in the mscatalog table. You can insert a row for the table into mscatalog. You have tried to load a template from a library that does not contain templates of that type (dialog, report, script, and so forth). Or you have called a popup list of templates (such as the Load from Library dialog) when the attached library does not contain templates of the correct type. Attach a library that contains templates of the correct type. You must be in vector or raster graphics mode before executing this command. An RIS error has occurred. DB Access displays the error. For information on RIS errors, see the Relational Interface System (RIS) for Windows NT SQL Users Guide.
No current universe.
No key column(s) defined for "<table>".
No MSCODELIST in current schema.
No rows found. No table <table> found.
No table <table> found in MSCATALOG.
No <type> templates found in library "<library>".
Not a graphic session.
RIS Error.
Schema "<schema>" not found in schema list.
You have specified a schema that is not in the current schema list. Check that you have correctly spelled the schema name. If you own or have been granted privileges on the schema, you can add it to the schema list. See the section Build Schema List (Schema Edit).
A schema list is necessary only for multischema joins. If no schema list is specified (using DBA_SCHEMA_LIST or the -S command-line option), any available RIS schema can be attached. Script template \<template>\ doesnt match function name \<function>\. Table "<table>" not found. You have specified a script template name that differs from the name of the function being saved in the template. The script template must match the name of the function. DB Access could not locate the table. Check the spelling of the table name. Check that the correct library is current. The scripting interpreter has encountered an operand that is unknown. Check that syntax is correct and any user variables have been defined.
Undefined symbol: <symbol>
DD - 8
Appendix E: DB Access Global Variables EE - 1
Appendix E
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
DB Access Global Variables
EE - 2
Appendix E: DB Access Global Variables
Appendix E
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
DB Access Global Variables

The following DBA parameters may be modified by the user, either from script or development platform code. In some cases, the variable is initialized by a shell variable or command switch. If these globals are defined before dba_setup() is called, they are overridden by the associated shell variable or command switch. They can be changed at any time thereafter. Some DB Access global variables (such as dba_schema or dba_schema_list) initiate actions. The results of these actions are modified by calling functions (such as dba_schema_select or dba_set_schema_list). However, many DB Access global variables can be declared extern and altered at runtime as in the following lists (from c:\win32app\ingr\dba\doc\globals.txt): DB Access character globals: (char *)s are malloced to 100 characters, dbadev users (not script users) can realloc to desired length, DO NOT FREE!!!
extern char dba_app_id[16]; extern char dba_comma_character; extern char *dba_error_log; extern char *dba_last_keyin; extern char *dba_lib; extern char *dba_lib_list; extern char *dba_print; extern char *dba_prodname; extern char *dba_script_delimiter; extern char *dba_shell; extern char *dba_support; /* Argurment to ms_application_id(), default = DBA */ /* Embedded Command characters, default = , */ /* Redirects error form output to a named file (or /dev/null) */ /* Contains last field key-in (1000 characters max) */
/* DBA_PRINT command. See the file /usr#/ip32/dba/cfg/configure.dat. */ /* Product name (dba, x_dba, etc.) */ /* Document list delimiter for scripts, default = #" */ /* DBA_SHELL command. See the file /usr#/ip32/dba/cfg/configure.dat. */ /* Directory containing DB Access form, symbol and message files. This variable must be set before any DB Access function call. */ /* Document list delimiter for unix commands. Default = $ */ /* Document list delimiter for Microstation commands. Default = ! */ /* Current DBA version (major.minor) */
extern char *dba_timestamp_format; extern char dba_unix_delimiter;
extern char dba_ustn_delimiter;
extern char dba_version[12];
EE - 4
DB Access double globals:

extern double dba_fl_zoom; extern double dba_form_value; /* Same as locate set but only applies to the review of file linkages */ /* Value argument from I/Forms notify function. Buttons, toggles 0 or 1. Fields Row number. Sliders, scrollbars gadget value. */
DBA Form globals:

extern Form dba_form_ptr; /* I/Forms Form pointer of the last form notified. */
DB Access integer globals

extern int dba_attach_mode; /* 0=new, 1=existing, 2=info, 3=none. Used for ustn/raster Attach Linkage. RPT_NO. */ /* 0=interactive, 1=batch, if batch, disables schema password prompting, and directs Errors Detected output to stdout. */ /* Report page width (1-2000). */ /* 0=apply fence to query with prompt (default) 1=apply fence to query without prompt 2=ignore fence */ /* Form label of the last form notified. */ /* 0=none, 1=ustn, 2=raster, 3=both. NOTE: 3=both allows display of both ustn and raster, but all graphic commands will run in ustn mode unless set to 2. RPT_NO. */ /* 0=display help topic, then process commands, 1=display help topic only */ /* 0=do not expect multiple hits in joined tables, 1=check for multiple hits in joined tables */ /* Gadget label of the last gadget notified. */ /* Level mask for USTN Review Element and Locate Graphics commands. Default = { -1, -1, -1, -1 (all levels) */ /* 0=on levels only, 1=based on dba_level_mask */ /* Report page length (0-999). */ /* 0=multi, 1=range. Used for raster Attach Linkage shape. RPT_NO. */
extern int dba_batch_mode;
extern int dba_columns_per_page; extern int dba_fence_mode;
extern int dba_form_label; extern int dba_graphic_mode;
extern int dba_help_only;
extern int dba_join_to_many;
extern int dba_label; extern short dba_level_mask[4];
extern int dba_level_mode; extern int dba_lines_per_page; extern int dba_link_type;
extern int dba_link_mode; extern
extern
extern
extern extern extern
/* 0=RIS, 1=DMRS. RPT_NO. */ int dba_menu_lock; /* 0=normal, 1=any subsequent menus must be canceled before other inputs are accepted or script processing proceeds */ int dba_nest_mode; /* 0=simple element, 2=cells. Nest mode for rejecting complex element headers from USTN; determines what element types will be selectable. RPT_NO. */ int dba_no_put_field_notify; /* Makes dba_put_field() act just like FIfld_set_text() (instead of simulating a user key-in) */ int dba_partition_bits; /* RPT_NO. */ int dba_pause; int dba_select_button; /* Button for raster commands 0=left, 1=middle (default), 2=right */ int dba_status_field; /* Status field number (used in WINDOWS mod */ int dba_text_size; /* Report output form text size (1-5) */ short dba_type_mask[8]; /* Element type mask for USTN Review Element and Locate Graphics commands. Default = { -1, -1, -3, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1 } (all types except 34) */ int dba_user_entitynum; /* Optional user-defined value for user links */ int dba_user_mslink; /* System-generated value when attaching and reviewing user linkages. */ int dba_user_raslink; /* Optional user-defined value for user links. */
DB Access logical globals: (0 = false, 1 = true)

extern int dba_alias_table_report; extern int dba_auto_change_all; extern int dba_autocommit; /* 0=Use table names in report selects, 1=Use table aliases in report selects * /* 0=Change All displays SQL Statements form, 1=Change All issues update command */ /* 0=Dont let DBA turn autocommit off. 1=Let DBA turn autocommit off. Default=0. See the file /usr#/ip32/dba/doc/autocommit.doc */
extern int dba_blank_pad; extern int dba_code_sort; extern int dba_delete_row_toggle;
extern int dba_dbase_link; extern int dba_dmrs_link; extern int dba_ignore_scroll; extern int dba_informix_link; extern int dba_insert_read_only;
/* 0=Dont delete associated row. 1=Delete associated row. For Remove Linkage command. RPT_NO. */ /* Honor USTN DBASE links. */ /* Honor USTN DMRS links. */ /* 0=Notify MCF pokes on scroll bars, 1=No notify. */ /* Honor USTN INFORMIX links. */ /* 0=Dont include READ ONLY column gadgets when inserting rows. 1=Include READ ONLY column gadgets when inserting rows. (Default =0. This is useful to keep dialogs with the same column displayed twice from giving an RIS
EE - 6
extern int dba_mce_restrict; extern int dba_message_strip;
/* /*
extern int dba_normal_text;
/*
extern int dba_no_cursor; extern int dba_no_formfeed; extern int dba_no_join_query;
/* /* /*
extern int dba_no_pop_to_top;
/*
extern int dba_no_review_totals;
/*
extern int dba_no_scaling;
/*
extern int dba_optimize; extern int dba_oracle_link; extern int dba_report_nulls;
/* /* /*
extern extern extern extern
int int int int
dba_ris_link; dba_select_distinct; dba_scrap; dba_sync_menus;
/* /*
error upon inserts.) RPT_NO. */ RPT_NO. */ 0=Dont display DB Access or EnvironV message strip. 1=Display DBA message strip. This variable must be set before any DB Access function call. */ 0=Display text as saved on forms/dialogs. 1=Display all text using normal style. (Reduces draw time on PCs using X.) Default=0. RPT_NO. */ 0=Display processing cursors. 1=Dont. */ 0=Formfeed between reports pages. 1=No formfeed. */ 0=Secondary join query is added for standard joins. 1=Secondary join query is ignored for standard joins. */ 0=re-displayed dialogs are popped to top, 1=no action on re-displayed dialogs */ 0=Total numeric columns in review. 1=No totals. RPT_NO. */ 0=Scale/move all forms and dialogs based on terminal size or first form/dialog. 1=Inhibit auto scaling. Default=0. RPT_NO. */ 0=Dont optimize. 1=Optimize. */ Honor USTN ORACLE links. */ 0=Dont give error on script or numeric field NULL column, 1=give error (default=0) */ Honor USTN RIS links. */ Report select distinct. */
extern int dba_sync_worksheets;
extern int dba_tmp_output;
/* 0=Dont update like-table menus when current row changes, 1=update like-table menus when current row changes (default=0) */ /* 0=Dont synchronize worksheets on vertical scroll. 1=Synchronize worksheets on vertical scroll. Default = 1. RPT_NO. */ /* 0=Dont override report output filename, 1=All report output is placed in TMPDIR (usually /usr/tmp) with a unique name. */ /* Honors Column Scrolling YES/NO from builder for worksheets. */
extern int dba_write_access; extern int dba_ws_column_scroll;
DBA Raster globals: Some of the following variables can be overwritten by what is set in the raster.ctl file.
extern int dba_border_mode; /* 0=No borders. 1=Borders. (Environ V version only.) */ /* 0=Current. 2=Alternate. (Environ V version only.) */ /* 0=On. 1=Off. Used with dba_display_graphics and dba_window_area. You can skip the overview and go straight to a window area. */ /* 0=Off. 1=On. If set dba_delete_window(int file_id); script will be called whenever a window is deleted. */ /* 0=Off. 1=On. If this is on, the linkage blocks are automatically displayed on every refresh. */ /* 0=Permanent. 1=Pop-up. Used to control the behavior of the graphics dialog activated by the left mouse button. */ /* 0=Performance. 1=Quality. Controls whether or not extra care is taken to preserve the quality of the displayed image, at the expense of performance. */ /* Same as locate set but applies only to the review of file linkages. */ /* Same as locate set but only applies to the review of file linkages. */ /* 1=Range. 2=Multi-sided. Used to control what type linkages will be created by notes, file, and database links. */ /* Default= 4. This is the color used to highlight during review element. The valid colors are: LIGHT CYAN 0 DARK GRAY 1 BLACK 2 YELLOW 3 LIGHT GRAY 4 DARK CYAN 5 WHITE 6 LIGHT RED 7 LIGHT GREEN 8 LIGHT BLUE 9 BROWN 10 DARK RED 11 DARK GREEN 12 DARK BLUE 13
extern int dba_virtual_screen;
extern int dba_overview_mode;
extern int dba_delete_notify;
extern int dba_auto_display_links;
extern int dba_menu_mode;
extern int dba_dec_type;
extern int dba_fl_mode; extern int dba_fl_blink;
extern int dba_linkage_type;
extern int dba_hl_color;
EE - 8
DARK MAGENTA LIGHT MAGENTA extern int dba_fg_color; extern int dba_bg_color; extern int dba_file_link_color extern int dba_note_link_color extern int dba_user_link_color extern int dba_database_link_color extern int dba_raster_menu_disable
14 15
extern char *dba_files_path; extern char *dba_files_drive;
*/ /* Default is 2. Foreground color of the raster display. */ /* Default is 6. Background color of the raster display. */ /* Default is 11. Attach File link color. */ /* Default is 9. Attach Note link color. */ /* Default is 3. Attach User link color. */ /* Default is 8. Attach (database) link color. */ /* Default is 0. If set the dba_g_menu will not be displayed when the user hits the hot key "v". */ /* Default graphics directory. */ /* Defaults graphics drive. */
To be able to view database links between unix and dos, two global pointers have been set up. DB Access stores the original location of a file in the database (dba_files). When a user displays a file, that file is checked against dba_files table to see if it already has a file number assigned to it. DB Access checks for three file combination based on the previous pointers. 1) drive_path_filename to database 2) dba_files_path/filename to database 3) dba_files_drive/path_filename to database where drive_path_filename is: /usr/files/demo.tg4 or c:lesemo.tg4 where dba_files_path is: /usr/files or c:les where dba_files_drive is: /usr or c If after three attempts to make a match fail, a new entry will be put into the database. extern int dba_redline_mode; /* 0=dm redline mode, 1=dba database mode this variable will have an effect on the following "dba standard buttons": Draw Draw Draw Draw Draw Arc Arrow Circle Ellipse Filled Circle
* ** ** ** * ** *
Draw Filled Ellipse Draw Filled Rectangle Draw Filled Shape Draw Freehand Draw Line Draw Rectangle Draw Shape Draw Symbol Draw Text Copy Redline Delete Redline Move Redline Select Redline Undo Redline
Draw Freehand, Draw Symbol and Select Redline only work on the pc version of dba. Copy, Delete, Move, and Undo redlines only work on dm redlines. They will NOT work on dba database redlines. /* 0=Off. 1=On. Control variable to determine whether or not the system supplied window names are written to the window border. */
**
extern int dba_window_names
EE - 10
Glossary GL - 1
Glossary
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
GL - 2
Glossary
Glossary GL - 3
Glossary
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
absolute pathname
Sequence of directories, beginning with the root directory (/) that locates a file. See also pathname and relative pathname. Receive input, such as characters, integers, or data buttons. Also, confirming an element selection. Perform actions necessary to use software. Key-in mode that lets a user add query criteria. Label, name, or number that identifies an exact storage location in memory. An alternate label for a command, program, or database entity such as a line added to the start-up file that lets you start the software without having to key in the full pathname each time you want to use the software. Handwriting and other editing marks placed on a document image using the graphics tablet or the mouse. Acronym for American National Standards Institute, a private organization that develops, maintains, and publishes industry standards in the United States. System of programs or utilities designed to accomplish specific tasks as requested by the user. Data structure used to organize data into contiguous lists. Keys used to move from one field of a menu or form to another. American Standard Code for Information Interchange character set. The features of an object, such as color, line width, font, and font size. Rectangular graphic gadget that has a three-dimensional appearance. Binary digit represented by a 1 or 0. Smallest unit of storage in a digital computer.
accept
access add query address
alias
annotation
ANSI
application
array arrow keys
ASCII
attributes
bezel
bit
GL - 4
Glossary
bitmap
An ordered array of pixels turned off and on to create a graphical image on a computer screen. Unit of storage which usually equals the amount of data that can be read from or written to the storage device. For example, most disk drives read or write a minimum of 512 bytes. Therefore, the block size of most disk drives is 512 bytes. A line on a report template that prints at the end of each page. Interruption of OM processing made possible through ODEN. Breakpoints are set so as to pass control back to the debugger from execution mode. Data area. State gadget that has a three-dimensional appearance and can be set on or off. Group of bits forming a unit of storage in a digital computer. A byte usually consists of 8 bits but can contain more or fewer depending on the model of computer. Bytes can also contain error recognition information. General-purpose, structured programming language developed at Bell Labs in the early 1970s. Acronym for Computer-Aided Design. Key-in mode that lest a user change the value of one or more columns in the current row. Data type which stores one character. Alphabetic letter, digit, punctuation, or symbol. A small box that lets you select or unselect an option. When the check box is selected, an X appears in the box. State gadget consisting of one or more boxes, followed by text or symbols, usually arranged in a column. To activate buttons, fields, and so forth on forms. Pointing to a menu command, button, or item on your screen and quickly pressing and releasing the left mouse button. Portion of a client/server-based application that requests services.
block
bottom line
breakpoint
buffer button
byte
CAD change row
char character check box
checklist
choose clicking
client
Glossary GL - 5
CLIX
Version of the UNIX operating system ported to run on Intergraph systems. A set of unique column values stored in a join table. A coded column accepts values only from its code list. A column that accepts values only from its code list. A coded column is represented by a row in the mdcodelist table. Changing a form or window from the normal display to a small icon representing the collapsed form or window. Also called minimize. A logical grouping of files for ftr searching and indexing. Vertical arrangement of figures or words. On a menu, a gadget that displays values for the current row. On a report template, a field that displays data from a specified column for each row processed. Software that interacts with the user, obtaining user input and then acting in a specified way based on that input. Each icon on the menu accesses a command, although there could also be additional commands accessed only by key-in. Alphanumeric key-ins used to invoke an executable directly from the operating system environment. Alphanumeric string that corresponds to a given command. A command name. Translate a program written in some programming language into machine language or assembly language. Process that eliminates gaps, empty fields, redundancies, or unnecessary data in a file so that the size of the file is reduced. Value that remains unchanged during a programs execution. A list of commands that manipulate the window. The commands let you resize, move, close, maximize and minimize the window, and switch to other applications. Ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in a coordinate system. A field on a report template that keeps track of how many input rows have been processed.
code list
coded column
collapse
collection column column field
command
command line
command string
compile
compress
constant Control Menu
coordinates
counter field
GL - 6
Glossary
cursor
Pointer that the user moves on the screen to indicate an item or area. (DDL) Subset of the ANSI SQL Standard statements which defines the schemas and relations of a database. Either a filed object space that contains information about the classes that make up an application or a set of ASCII files created by a utility called a data dictionary processor (ddp). Automatic method of passing data between two or more gadgets. (DML) Subset of the ANSI SQL Standard statements which manipulate the data contained in a table. Point entered with the mouse or with a precision key-in, which specifies a position in a drawing file. Structure whose components are data objects. Data structures are used to group logically related data. Classification of a data item as an integer, letter, or real number. Collection of comprehensive informational files having predetermined structure and organization that can then be communicated, interpreted, or processed by a specific program. User on a database or a schema defined on that user which has complete access to all data defined on a database. A field on a report template that prints the system date. Relational database management system. Acronym for Database Administrator or DB Access. Acronym for Data Definition Language. Acronym for Digital Equipment Corporation. Predetermined value of a parameter or option that is automatically supplied by the system or program whenever a value is not specified by the user. To remove, destroy, eliminate, or erase. Separating mark or space; a character or sequence of contiguous characters that mark the end of a string of characters.
Data Definition Language data dictionary
data link
Data Manipulation Language data point
data structure
data type
database
database administrator date field DB2 DBA DDL DEC default
delete delimiter
Glossary GL - 7
derived field
A field on a report template that prints the results of a formula. File containing graphic and text data. Also called a drawing file. Base or foundation of software on which application programs can be built. Nonaddressable component of a network, that is, a component onto which a user cannot log, for example, tape drive, disk drive, and floppy disk. Numeric gadget that accepts and displays numerical values in a circular format. A box that requests information about a particular task you are performing. A button or command that is displayed in light gray instead of black. When a button or command is dimmed, it is disabled and nonselectable. Round flat plate coated with a magnetic substance on which data is stored. Acronym of Data Manipulation Language. A software package that provides functionality to manage data and data objects across a large network. A file or many files that are handled as one entity to the redlining software. Data type which stores a range of floating point numbers. The storage requirement and range of values are dependent on the computer and compiler. A file that contains graphics or images such as a MicroStation or a CAD file. To discontinue current status or association; to return to a previous or more primitive status or association; to descend levels. To add, delete, or change text, graphics, and objects. To enter data from a mouse or from a keyboard. Graphic or descriptive component in a graphics file. Can also mean a database table.
design file
development platform
device
dial
dialog box
dimmed
disk
DML DM/Manager
document
double
drawing
drop
edit enter entity
GL - 8
Glossary
environment variable
Variable defined on or across invocations of a command shell. Processes are given access to the information in these variables by the operating system. Description of an error found in a program. Popular implementation of a local area network. To terminate a job or process. Any of the data grouped together in a record (also known as an attribute or column). Also, a gadget allowing text entry on a form. Collection of logical records stored as a unit. Process that denies access to a file. User-defined name given to an interactively created file. The name should be relevant to the contents of the file. A variable that can be set to indicate the presence or absence of a certain condition. Complete set and style of the characters and symbols of a typeface used for displaying text. Rectangular display through which a user and an application can communicate using gadgets. Drawn or done by hand without the use of an instrument such as a ruler or compass. Name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file, including the filename. See also relative pathname. Small segment of code written to complete a portion of a larger task. Graphic device on a form that helps a user enter or receive specific information. Unique integer identifier for a gadget, supplied by the software. Numeric gadget that can only be used to display numerical output. Programming variable that is recognized everywhere in a program.
error message Ethernet exit field
file file locking filename
flag
font
form
freehand
full pathname
function
gadget
gadget label
gauge
global variable
Glossary GL - 9
graphic
Any symbol or method of visual communication that is not text. Network of uniformly spaced horizontal and perpendicular lines that help to identify 2-D or 3-D relationships. A collection of icons that represent documents and applications within the Program Manager. User or programmer defined group of logically related gadgets. See on-line Help. Form in which the Help topics are displayed by the Help process. A match found for search criteria. Parallel to, in the plane of, or operating in a plane parallel to the horizon or to a base line. Symbol that graphically identifies a command, application, or document. Name composed of numbers or characters given for identification purposes to a record. A record number. To indicate your selection on a form or graphics by placing a data point on the item. File that contains information such as symbolic constants, structure definitions, variable declarations, and some standard functions and macros. Storage mechanism used to provide faster access to the rows in a table. Intergraph Network File Manager software package. Relational database management system. Relational database management system. To set storage location, counter, variable, internal structures, or the like to a beginning value. Data type which stores a range of integer values. Value in the set of all positive and negative whole numbers and zero. Also, a data type which stores a range of integer values. Storage requirement and range of values are
grid
group
group gadget
Help Help window
hit horizontal
icon
ID
identify
include file
index
I/NFM INFORMIX INGRES initialize
int integer
GL - 10
Glossary
dependent on the computer and compiler. Of or relating to the process of entering data and receiving a response from the computer. interactive Of or relating to the process of entering data and receiving a response from the computer. Shared boundary through which the user and software communicate. Intergraph On-line Reference Library. Provides easy access to Intergraph documentation on compact disk. Unit of storage within a larger unit, such as a file in a cabinet. Point of orientation for text placement. Key-in mode that lets a user retrieve the first row in the current table having the specified column value. Information or command keyed in, rather than selected using a mouse. Mode that determines the effect of a user key-in in a menu column field. The four key-in modes are change row, add query, update active, and key column. Collection of subroutines. Combine one or more program segments, subroutines, or library routine into a single executable program. A box that displays a list of available options. The physical location of the data on the machine or the location of the data by the way of remote mounting capabilities. Username/password combination used to gain access to a computer. A function provided with the C programming language that allocates space at runtime. The functions argument specifies the amount of space required. This function returns a pointer to the first address of the allocated memory. Value with bits set on and off to set up certain attributes. Device that can store data.
interface
I/ORL
item
justification key column
key-in
key-in mode
library link
list box local
log-in
malloc
mask memory
Glossary GL - 11
menu
Means for storing and selecting commands: icon-based, function key, or paper. A list of menus for the window. Forms system gadget that appears along the bottom of a form and is used to display prompt and error messages to the user. Area of the screen that contains the workstation icon, the message area and the process ID field. Computer-aided design software. Computer-aided design system for Intergraph workstations. Particular functioning arrangement or condition. Also, the behavior of a gadget. Hand-controlled input and command selection device. There are several models; most common are the 2-button mouse, the 3-button mouse, and the 12-button mouse. Database table required by MicroStation 32 for databases used with graphics. Key columns defined in mscatalog provide a means of unique row identification. Database table required for a schema using coded columns. Column in a database table used to uniquely identify a row. MicroStation uses mslink to specify a row that a graphics element is linked to. A menu gadget that displays data from one or more columns in the current row. Interconnection of host computers and workstations that lets them share data and control. The term network can mean the devices that connect the system, or it can mean the connected system. Acronym for Network File System. The NFS product lets you access files that are physically located on another node on your local area network (LAN). Network file systems will appear local to the NFS client. Any nonaddressable component of a network; that is, any component of the network onto which a user can locally or remotely log. Symbolic name given to each device on an ethernet network which can be translated into a network address.
menu bar message field
message strip
MicroStation MicroStation 32 mode
mouse
mscatalog
mscodelist mslink
multiple column field
network
NFS
node
nodename
GL - 12
Glossary
NULL numeric field
Indicates no value. A field on a report template that provides default calculations on a numeric column value. A set of associative geometry elements placed using the Place Macro command. Set of on-line, context sensitive files, that provide information to the user about the capabilities of an application. System programs that control the overall operation of a computer system. Symbol that indicates that an arithmetic, logical, or relational operation is to be performed. Relational database management system. See I/ORL. Reduced resolution display of an image in a raster data file. An overview is normally located in the raster data file itself. A field on a report template that prints the current page number. Set or assortment of colors, or a collection of logically related menu buttons, or a level of menu buttons. Panel of buttons to the right of the window area. The buttons are arranged hierarchically and are used to select commands. Property that associates a variable name with a value. Word that is entered during log in that prevents unauthorized people from using the file, software, or computer. Sequence of directories leading to a file or a sequence of menus leading to a command. Sequence of directories leading to a file. See also absolute pathname and relative pathname. 1) Smallest possible unit of a screen display that can be manipulated; 2) Picture element. Small, colored dot of light on the screen that, when combined with others, forms an image. To create and position an element or object.
occurrence
on-line Help
operating system
operator
ORACLE ORL overview
page field
palette
panel menu
parameter password
path
pathname
pixel
place
Glossary GL - 13
portable
Designating a program that is easily executed (or can be easily modified to execute) on multiple computers or software systems. A line on a report template that prints once at the beginning of the report. After preface lines are printed, the report continues on a new page. Used to print a cover sheet, title page, or legend. Program that performs some type of calculation or manipulations on the data in a file, usually in preparation for another process. Writes data to the request, graphics, and output files when the defined event has the specified relationship to VALUE. Described by the ANSI SQL Standard. A privilege is a right to access. For example: a relation privilege is a right to access a relation (table or view) within a database. Entity composed of a program or series of programs. The main window in Microsoft Windows, used to start applications and open documents. It also organizes the applications and documents into groups. Within these groups reside icons that represent each application and document. Text displayed by a command that tells you the inputs expected by that command. A search in a database. Values used to limit a database search. Pattern of horizontal scanning lines on the screen of a CRT: input data causes the beam of the tube to illuminate the correct pixels on these lines to produce the required characters, curves, and so forth. Generic term that refers to a group of pixels. Each of these pixels has an associated color and together they form a viewable image. File containing raster data (pixels). Raster data files can be generated by optical scanner, video frame grabber, digital camera, interactive paint package, and so forth. Intergraph raster data files are characterized by specific data formats which are identified in the file headers. See raster data file.
preface line
preprocessor
PRINT
privilege
process Program Manager
prompt
query query criteria raster
raster data
raster data file
raster file
GL - 14
Glossary
raster graphics raster image RDBMS
Term that may refer to raster data, canvases, or files. See raster data. Acronym for Relational Database Management System, the software that lets you organize, store, and manipulate data in a database. A function provided with the C programming language that changes the size of memory allocated from a previous call to malloc. The functions argument specifies the new amount of space required. A pointer to the new block of space is returned. Graphic gadget that can be used to group related gadgets or draw solid rectangles. Table or view. Organizes data in two-dimensional tables to define relationships. Database management system that adheres to concepts defined by the relational database model. Intergraph software system that provides a generic interface for applications to access many popular relational database management systems. Operators used to test specified conditions. Used to search for ranges of database column values. Sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular file. See also pathname and absolute pathname. Standard and user-definable table format for information queried from the database. A template that can be processed against input data to produced formatted output. To change the size and position of a form or window. Number of pixels of which a screen is composed. The greater the number of pixels, the higher the resolution. To erase all editing changes on an image, leaving the original image complete. Acronym for Relational Interface System, the software that lets different relational database management systems communicate with each other.
realloc
rectangle
relation relational database
relational database management system Relational Interface System
relational operators
relative pathname
report
report template
resize resolution
restore
RIS
Glossary GL - 15
rotate
To turn; to change the angular orientation; to transform by revolution about a specific axis. Set of functions constructed to process specific information. Grouping of logically related data which may be manipulated as a single entity. One or more rows make up a file or table. Also known as a record or tuple. To execute a program or process. Time at or during which a program or process is executed. Concept described by the ANSI SQL Standard as a collection of tables and views. Within RIS, this collection corresponds to the collection of tables and views within a database. Arrow or crosshairs that are controlled by the mouse. C-like statements that let you further customize reports. To move vertically or horizontally through displayed text, symbols, or windows. Small adjacent buttons on a scroll bar that move the display up and down, or left and right, depending upon the scroll bar orientation. A gadget that lets you move vertically or horizontally through displayed text symbols. Also, a numeric gadget you can use to send numerical values to another gadget. To activate a command. This can be done by the user or software. Computer, connected to a network, that provides services to one or more devices on that network. A server can also refer to a process that provides services to one or more client (requester) processes locally or remotely. Grouping of items that can be manipulated as a single item. Intergraph graphical user-interface toolkit for Windows NT. Body of commands providing interface to low level software. For example, a UNIX shell provides an interface between users and the UNIX kernel. Data type which stores a range of integer values. Storage requirement and range of values are dependent on the computer and compiler.
routine row
run runtime schema
screen cursor scripts scroll
scroll arrows
scroll bar
select
server
set Shamrock shell
short
GL - 16
Glossary
slider
Numeric gadget that accepts and displays numerical values. Also, the three-dimensional portion of a slider gadget that moves along a linear track. Acronym for Systems Network Architecture. The primary networking strategy for IBM, introduced in 1974. SNA is made up of a variety of hardware and software products that interact together. Acronym for Structured Query Language. Word or group of words that has a specific meaning in a programming language. Steps that an item goes through from creation to completion. Terminate a job or process. Information in DM/Manager that describes a physical location for storing files. Sequence of characters. Structured language designed for accessing relational database management systems. Rules governing the structure and use of statements in a language. Collection of information and processes designed to interact to complete a task. Collection of data for quick reference, stored in sequential locations in memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of the same type. To quickly press and immediately release a button. A CLIX file that stores templates. Graphic gadget used to label other gadgets. A field on a report template that prints a text string. A field on a report template that prints the time the report was processed. The area of a window in which the title is displayed. To switch; to change between two alternatives. Also, a state gadget that can be used to change between two alternatives.
SNA
SQL statement
states stop storage area
string Structured Query Language syntax
system
table
tap template library text text field time field
title bar toggle
Glossary GL - 17
transaction
Concept described by the ANSI SQL Standard. A transaction is a group of SQL Statements that affect the database simultaneously or can be canceled simultaneously. Type of data that a programming variable can contain. A group of rows that match the current query criteria. A universe is generated by Process Query. A formatted listing of the current universe. It contains all columns that are toggled on. General purpose operating system developed at Bell Laboratories in the late 60s and early 70s. Key-in mode that lets a user establish a new row in the current table. Used with Insert Row. Person who uses a computer. Numeric or character data. Quantity that can assume any one of a set of values. Quantity possessing both magnitude and direction, generally represented as a line. Vectors can be manipulated geometrically and are represented as a coordinate triple (x,y,z). Graphics composed of traditional geometric elements such as lines, circles, curves, surfaces, and solids. Vector geometry can be represented by mathematical expressions defining all points on the geometry. The number associated with the specific release of a product. Concept described by the ANSI SQL Standard, used to combine tables or restrict access to columns in a table. A view looks and acts like a table, but does not actually store data. Independent rectangular area which displays applications or documents and that can be moved, resized, reshaped, minimized, or maximized. A border around the outside edge of a window. General purpose 32-bit operating system developed at Microsoft Corporation. A multiple column field that displays data from one or more rows.
type universe
universe review
UNIX
update active
user value variable vector
vector graphics
version view
window
window border Windows NT
worksheet
GL - 18
Glossary
workstation
Terminal that contains an internal CPU and can operate in a standalone mode or as part of a network. Communication protocol used on the Ethernet network.
XNS
Index IN - 1
Index
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
IN - 2
Index
Index IN - 3
Index
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
A accessing Database Edit 9-3 Dialog Builder 4-7 Report Builder 5-6 Schema Edit 11-3 Add Query A-1, A-3 altering global variables EE-3 AND/OR Toggle A-5 Application Builder 3-3 arrays U-19 automatic resizing U-19 ASCII Structure D-5 Attach DAP Link A-7, A-10 Attach DB Linkage A-12, A-15 Attach File Link A-17 Attach Note Link A-19 attaching schema 2-5 Auto Sequence A-21 B Before You Begin 1-3 Binary Structure D-7 Bitmap Loader 8-3 bitmap utility 8-3 breakpoints editing 6-9 reviewing 6-9 setting 6-9 Build Schema List B-1 Button B-4 C Cancel C-1, C-3 Change All C-4, C-6 Change Row C-8 C-9 changes to DM/DB Access 2-5 character user variables U-19 Check Box C-11 choose 1-4 Clear All Dialogs C-12 client locate R-69
code lists E-1 code slots adding E-2 E-3 deleting E-3 code values entering E-4 coded columns E-1 adding C-33 Column C-13 Column (Report Builder) C-14 column values changing 9-7 columns coded E-1, BB-6, C-33 key BB-4, C-32 defining BB-5 mslink BB-4 serial 9-7 timestamp CC-3 Combo Box C-18 Copy Field C-19 Copy Gadget C-21 Copy Line C-23 Copy Redlines C-25 Counter (Report Builder) C-27 create schema DB2 R-44 INFORMIX R-40 INGRES R-43 ORACLE R-42 OS400 R-49 RDB R-46 SYBASE R-47 Create Sequence C-36 create table R-61 Create/Alter Table C-29 Create/Edit Group C-35 Current Row C-38 C-39 Current Row Slider C-40 Current Row Text C-42 Current Table Text C-44
IN - 4
Index
D data definition R-58 Database Edit accessing 9-3 graphics linkages 12-4 Database Utilities D-1 Date D-3 DB Access graphics linkages 12-4 invoking from MicroStation 12-5 reserved tables mscatalog R-12, R-27 templates 2-6 DB2 create schema R-44 dba_files 12-10 dba_links 12-10 dba_points 12-10 DBA_RASTER 12-10 debugging scripts 6-6 Define Structure D-5 Delete D-11 Delete All D-12 D-13 Delete Field D-15 Delete Gadget D-17 Delete Group D-19 Delete Line D-20 Delete Redlines D-21 Delete Row R-8, R-12, D-23 D-24 Delete Sequence D-26 Delete Space D-27 deleting rows D-12 deleting rows D-23 Derived D-28 Design Options D-30 designing dialogs 4-6 Dial D-32 Dialog Builder accessing 4-7 dialogs alter table R-64 blank 4-5 create schema R-37 create table R-61 data definition R-58 database 4-3 default 4-3 designing 4-6 dictionary access R-53
dialogs (continued) drop schema R-51 drop table R-63 exclude R-66 include R-65 locate client R-69 modify node information R-55 modify schema password R-54 no database 4-3 schema definition R-34 schema file R-67 schema information R-36 schema manager R-32 scripts 4-6 secure schema access R-52 set R-70 table information R-60 dictionary access R-53 Display Dialog D-38 Display Group D-34 displayable attributes processing (DAP) A-7 batch A-9 DM/DB Access new features 2-5 document conventions 1-4 Document List D-40 Draw Arc D-43 Draw Arrow D-45 Draw Block D-47 Draw Circle D-49 Draw Ellipse D-51 Draw Filled Block D-53 Draw Filled Circle D-55 Draw Filled Ellipse D-57 Draw Filled Shape D-59 Draw Freehand D-61 Draw Line D-63 Draw Shape D-65 Draw Symbol D-67 Draw Text D-69 Drop From Group D-71 Drop Table D-72 Dump Template D-73 E Edit Code E-1, E-5 Edit Dialog Parameter E-7 Edit Field E-10 Edit Gadget E-11 Edit Line E-13
Index IN - 5
Edit Privileges E-16 Edit Query E-18 E-19 Edit Relations 2-8 Edit Report Parameters E-21 Edit Script 6-3 editing database values 9-7 environment variable II_SYSTEM R-43 environment variables AA-3 Erase Fence E-23 error messages DD-3 Exit E-24 Expanded Summary E-26 F Fence Block F-1 Fence Copy F-2 Fence Delete F-4 Fence Edit F-6 Fence Move F-9 Fence Operations F-11 Fence Shape F-12 Field Format (Report Builder) F-13 Field Operations (Report Builder) F-18 Field Plus F-19 fields column C-14 counter C-27 date D-3 derived D-28 formats F-13 numeric N-11 page P-1 placing P-12 printing P-13 text T-5 time T-8 Fields On/Off F-15 F-16 Fit F-20, F-22 function variable displaying 6-10 G Gadget Groups G-1 Gadget Operations (Dialog Builder) G-2 Gadget Sequencing G-3 General Utilities G-5 graphics database linkages 12-4 linkages 12-4 raster 12-3, 12-7
graphics (continued) vector 12-3 Grid G-6 Grid Lock G-7 Group Box G-9 Group Copy G-10 Group Delete G-12 Group Edit G-14 Group Move G-17 Group Operations G-19 H Help H-1 using on-line 1-6 I identify 1-4 II_SYSTEM R-43 INFORMIX create schema R-40 serial columns 9-7 INGRES schema table R-43 Initialize Query I-1 I-2 Insert Row I-4 I-5, U-9, U-12 Insert Space (Report Builder) I-7 invoking DB Access from MicroStation 12-5 J join columns 2-7 multi-schema 2-7 outer join 2-8 K Key Column K-1 K-2 key columns BB-4, C-32 defining BB-5 key in 1-5 L libraries 2-6 Line L-1 line breakpoints 6-9 Line Operations (Report Builder) L-3 Line Script L-4 Linkage Mode L-9, A-12 Links Commands L-7 List Box L-11 Load File L-12, L-14
IN - 6
Index
Load From Library L-15 loading templates query E-18 locate client R-69 Locate Graphics L-18 L-19 logical operators A-2 M Measure M-1, M-3 memory reallocation U-19 MicroStation design files 12-3 invoking DB Access 12-5 MicroStation Command Environment (mce) 12-6 MicroStation commands Place Fence A-13 modify DB2 password R-57 modify node information R-55 modify schema password R-54 Modify Sort M-4 mouse 1-4 Move Field M-8 Move Gadget M-10 Move Line M-12 Move Redlines M-13 mscatalog R-12, R-27 mscodelist BB-6 mslink BB-4, R-12, R-27, 12-5 Multi Gadget M-19 Multi-Column Field M-18 Multiple Column M-15 Multiple Reports M-23 multi-schema joins 2-7 N New Blank dialog N-1 report N-2 New Default dialog N-4 report N-6 Next Row N-9 Numeric N-11 O off fields F-15 on fields F-15 on-line Help 1-6
ORACLE create schema R-42 OS400 create schema R-49 outer join 2-8 Override Key-in O-1 P Page P-1 Pan P-3, P-5 parts of the Help window 1-6 Pick Row P-6 Place Fence P-8 Place Fence Shape P-10 Place Field (Report Builder) P-12 Place Gadget P-14 Place Line P-22 placing fields P-12 column C-14 counter C-27 date D-3 derived D-28 numeric N-11 page P-1 text T-5 time T-8 Plot Window P-25, P-27 Previous Row P-28 print condition P-13 privileges granting E-16 revoking E-16 Process Query P-31 P-32 Process Report A-13, P-34 Q queries editing E-18 loading E-18 processing P-31 saving E-18 Query Q-1 query criteria adding A-1 clearing I-1 creating 9-5 logical operators A-2 processing 9-5 relational operators A-2 substring searches A-1 using 9-5
Index IN - 7
Quit Q-3, Q-5 R Radio Button R-1 raster graphics 12-3, 12-7 Cancel C-3 commands 12-10 12-11 Erase Fence E-23 Fence Block F-1 Fence Shape F-12 Fit F-22 Load File L-14 Measure M-3 Pan P-5 Plot Window P-27 Quit Q-5 Rotate Raster R-74 Show Links S-18 Update U-8 Window Area W-3 Window Center W-6 Window Scroll W-9 Zoom In Z-3 Zoom Out Z-6 Raster View R-3 RDB, create schema R-46 Rectangle R-5 relational operators A-2, R-6 Remove Fence R-8, R-10 Remove Linkage R-12, R-15 Report R-17 R-18 Report Builder accessing 5-6 reports blank N-2, 5-5 default N-6, 5-3 saving S-5 unrelated tables 5-6 reserved tables BB-3 mscatalog R-12, R-27 reset 1-4 Restore Defaults R-19 R-20 Review R-22, R-24 Review Element R-26, R-29 Review Sequence R-31 Review Variables 6-10 Rotate R-72 Rotate Raster R-74 rows changing values C-4 deleting D-12, D-23
rows (continued) inserting I-4, U-9, U-12 reviewing R-22 unique identifying BB-4 S Save Dialog (Dialog Builder) S-1 Save Options S-3 Save Report S-5 saving templates query E-18 schema attaching 2-5 Schema Edit 11-3 accessing 11-3 schema lists building B-1 schema manager R-32 activating R-32 create schema R-37 DB2 R-44 INFORMIX R-40 INGRES R-43 ORACLE R-42 OS400 R-49 RDB R-46 SYBASE R-47 data definition R-58 alter table R-64 create table R-61 drop table R-63 table information R-60 dictionary access R-53 drop schema R-51 exclude R-66 include R-65 locate client R-69 modify DB2 password R-57 modify node information R-55 modify schema password R-54 schema definition R-34 schema file R-67 schema information R-36 secure schema access R-52 set R-70 Schema Select S-7 Script Debugger 6-6 Script Debugger Dialog Options 6-6 scripting dialogs 4-6
IN - 8
Index
scripts creating 6-3 editing 6-3 Scrollbar S-9 secure schema access R-52 select 1-4 Select Redlines S-11 serial columns 9-7 Set Query S-13 Set/Review Breakpoints 6-9 Show Group S-15 Show Links S-16, S-18 Single Column S-19 Single Report S-23 Slider S-25 sort keys M-4 space deleting D-27 inserting I-7 Spin Box S-27 SQL Statements S-28, 10-3 structure templates ASCII D-5 binary D-7 user data D-9 Structured Query Language (SQL) 10-3 SQL statements create index BB-6 substring searches A-1 SYBASE, create schema R-47 Symbol S-30 System Command S-32 T table information R-60 Table Select T-1 tables adding mslink BB-4 altering C-29 copying C-32 creating C-29 dropping D-72 mscatalog BB-4 mscodelist BB-6 reserved BB-3, C-29 Template Librarian 7-3 template libraries 2-6 maintaining 7-3 templates 2-6 ASCII structure D-5 binary structure D-7
templates (continued) report ASCII dump D-73 blank N-2, 5-5 default N-6, 5-3 processing P-34 saving S-5 unrelated tables N-2, 5-6 user data structure D-9 templib 7-3 Text T-3 Text Box T-4 text nodes A-7 Text (Report Builder) T-5 Text Size T-7 Time T-8 timestamp columns CC-3 U Undelete Fence U-1 Undelete Field U-2 Undelete Gadget U-3 Undelete Group U-4 Undelete Line U-5 Undo Redlines U-15 unique row identification 9-7 universe of rows P-31, 9-5 universe review R-22 unrelated tables N-2 reports 5-6 Update U-6, U-8 Update Active U-9 U-10 Update Row U-12 U-13 updating database values 9-7 User Gadgets U-17 User Gauge G-4 User Variable U-19 user variables arrays U-19 character U-19 Userdata Structure D-9 using on-line Help 1-6 USTN Command U-22 V variables environment AA-3 global altering EE-3 vector graphics 12-3
Index IN - 9
viewing on-line Help 1-6 W Window Area W-1, W-3 Window Center W-4, W-6 Window Scroll W-7, W-9 Worksheet W-10 Z Zoom In Z-1, Z-3 Zoom Out Z-4, Z-6
IN - 10
Index

Access

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Access

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

DM/DB Access

Administrators Guide for Windows

Warranties and Liabilities

We want your suggestions...

If you need help, call...

Product & Documentation Support

Intergraph General Information

Table of Contents vii

Handling Events .......................................................................................... Accessing the Application Builder ...............................................................

viii Table of Contents

4.1.2 4.2 4.3 4.4

Blank Dialogs ...................................................................................

Accessing the Report Builder ...................................................................... Processing Reports .......................................................................................

Bitmap Loader ...................................................................................................... Accessing the Bitmap Loader ...............................................................................

Editing Database Values .............................................................................

Accessing DB Access from a MicroStation Design File .............

xii Table of Contents

Table of Contents xiii

xiv Table of Contents

Appendix A: Appendix B: B.1 B.2

DB Access Environment Variables ..................................................... DB Access Reserved Tables ................................................................

Appendix C: Appendix D: Appendix E:

Glossary ....................................................................................................................... Index ............................................................................................................................

Before You Begin 1 - 1

Before You Begin

Before You Begin

Before You Begin 1 - 3

Before You Begin

Before You Begin

Before You Begin 1 - 5

Before You Begin

1.1 Using On-line Help

1.1.1 Parts of the Help Window

Before You Begin 1 - 7

Before You Begin

2.1 DM/DB Access Structure and Functions

2.2 Changes to DM/DB Access

2.3 Creating a Database

2.4 Attaching a RIS Schema

2.5.1 Template Libraries

2.6 Join Columns

2.6.1 Multi-Schema Joins

2.6.2 Outer Joins

2.7 Edit Relations

3.1 Application Components

Main Application Window

3.2 Programming a Windows Application

3.2.1 Visual Interface API

3.3 Handling Events

3.4 Accessing the Application Builder

Double click on the dialog and the Palettes dialog appears.

Name Name of the palette.

Description Description of the palette.

Double click on the dialog and the Toolbar dialog appears.

Name The name of the toolbar.

Description The description of the toolbar.

Creating a Status bar

Name The name of the status bar.

Description The description of the status bar.

Height The height of the status bar.

Name The name of the application.

Description The description of the application.

Toolbar The toolbar to be attached to the application.

Statusbar The name of the status bar to be attached to the application.